Getting Started

06.07.
2017 Getting started
Getting started
Contents
1. 1 What's new?
1.1. 1.1 What's new in 5620 SAM Release 13.0
1.1.1. Maintenance releases
1.1.2. What's new in 5620 SAM Release 13.0 R5
2. 2 5620 SAM system overview
2.1. 2.1 5620 SAM system overview
2.1.1. 5620 SAM system architecture
2.1.2. Network management modules
2.2. 2.2 About this guide
3. 3 5620 SAM GUI overview
3.1. 3.1 5620 SAM GUI overview
3.1.1. GUI workspace elements
3.1.2. Custom workspaces
3.1.3. Shortcut keys and accessibility
3.1.4. Span of control
3.1.5. 5620 SAM clipboard
3.1.6. Text messages
3.1.7. User preferences
3.1.8. Task manager
3.1.9. Localized language support
3.2. 3.2 5620 SAM forms
3.2.1. More Actions button
3.2.2. List forms
3.2.3. Configuration forms
3.3. 3.3 5620 SAM GUI opening and closing procedures
3.3.1. Procedure 31 To open a singleuser GUI client on a Windows station
3.3.2. Procedure 32 To open a singleuser GUI client on a RHEL station
3.3.3. Procedure 33 To open a client GUI through a client delegate server
3.3.4. Procedure 34 To change to a different 5620 SAM client GUI user
3.3.5. Procedure 35 To close the 5620 SAM GUI
3.4. 3.4 Basic 5620 SAM GUI operation procedures
3.4.1. Procedure 36 To manage the display of windows and forms
3.4.2. Procedure 37 To save or open a set of forms for quick access
3.4.3. Procedure 38 To manage a window or form as an external window
3.4.4. Procedure 39 To send a text message to other 5620 SAM users
3.4.5. Procedure 310 To use configuration forms to configure or view parameters
3.4.6. Procedure 311 To manage configuration forms with builtin navigation trees
3.4.7. Procedure 312 To modify multiple objects at one time (multiedit)
3.4.8. Procedure 313 To use the 5620 SAM clipboard
3.4.9. Procedure 314 To monitor the 5620 SAM Task Manager
3.4.10. Procedure 315 To save listed information to a file
3.5. 3.5 5620 SAM GUI user preferences configuration procedures
3.5.1. Procedure 316 To configure 5620 SAM user preferences
3.5.2. Procedure 317 To set local tab preferences for configuration forms
3.5.3. Procedure 318 To temporarily display hidden tabs on property forms
3.5.4. Procedure 319 To export local tab preferences
3.5.5. Procedure 320 To import local tab preferences
3.5.6. Procedure 321 To configure the current client time zone
3.5.7. Procedure 322 To manage the display of listed information
3.6. 3.6 5620 SAM searches
3.6.1. Search filters
3.6.2. Simple searches
3.6.3. Advanced searches
3.6.4. Invalid attributes or values
3.6.5. Equipment group filters
3.6.6. Managing search results and lists
3.7. 3.7 5620 SAM search procedures
3.7.1. Procedure 323 To perform a simple search from an object list form
3.7.2. Procedure 324 To perform an advanced search from an object list form
3.7.3. Procedure 325 To perform a search by specifying endpoints
3.7.4. Procedure 326 To save search filters
3.7.5. Procedure 327 To use a saved search filter
3.7.6. Procedure 328 To delete a saved search filter
3.7.7. Procedure 329 To locate an attribute on a configuration form
3.7.8. Procedure 330 To use the Parameter Search Tool
3.7.9. Procedure 331 To filter object types
3.7.10. Procedure 332 To filter using span of control
3.7.11. Procedure 333 To configure and save equipment group filters
3.7.12. Procedure 334 To use a saved equipment group filter
4. 4 5620 SAM custom workspaces
4.1. 4.1 5620 SAM custom workspaces overview
4.1.1. Workspace customization
4.2. 4.2 Workflow to administer 5620 SAM custom workspaces
4.3. 4.3 Workflow to customize 5620 SAM workspaces
4.4. 4.4 Workflow to share workspaces
4.5. 4.5 5620 SAM GUI custom workspace procedures
4.5.1. Procedure 41 To create a new custom workspace
https://infocenter.alcatellucent.com/public/5620SAM130R5A/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/SAM_UG/html/sam_volume_about.html&cp=17_1_0 1/95
06.07.2017 Getting started
4.5.2. Procedure 42 To modify an existing workspace
4.5.3. Procedure 43 To customize window layouts
4.5.4. Procedure 44 To configure tab preferences
4.5.5. Procedure 45 To customize menus
4.5.6. Procedure 46 To customize toolbars
4.5.7. Procedure 47 To customize tree labels
4.5.8. Procedure 48 To customize topology map icon labels
4.5.9. Procedure 49 To customize list forms
4.5.10. Procedure 410 To configure the workspace selector
4.5.11. Procedure 411 To apply a different workspace using the workspace selector
4.5.12. Procedure 412 To delete a custom workspace
4.5.13. Procedure 413 To export custom workspaces
4.5.14. Procedure 414 To import a workspace
4.5.15. Procedure 415 To add new menu items to a custom workspace of an earlier 5620 SAM release
5. 5 5620 SAM navigation tree
5.1. 5.1 Navigation tree overview
5.1.1. Icons and labels
5.1.2. Equipment groups
5.1.3. Navigation tree toolbar
5.1.4. Contextual menus
5.2. 5.2 Basic navigation tree procedures
5.2.1. Procedure 51 To locate objects in the navigation tree
5.2.2. Procedure 52 To change the root object of a navigation tree
5.2.3. Procedure 53 To manage NEs in equipment groups on the navigation tree
6. 6 5620 SAM topology map management
6.1. 6.1 5620 SAM topology map management overview
6.1.1. Map window
6.1.2. Map panel
6.1.3. Map navigation tree
6.1.4. Map toolbar
6.1.5. Zooming in and out
6.1.6. Bookmarks
6.1.7. Information tables
6.1.8. Contextual menus
6.2. 6.2 5620 SAM topology map types
6.2.1. Physical topology map
6.2.2. Service tunnel topology map
6.2.3. EPS path topology maps
6.2.4. LSP path topology map
6.2.5. LSP crossconnect topology map
6.2.6. Flat maps
6.2.7. Service topology maps
6.2.8. Composite service topology maps
6.3. 6.3 Working with topology maps
6.3.1. Modifying a service from the topology view
6.3.2. Managing OAM diagnostics from the topology view
6.4. 6.4 Workflow to use 5620 SAM topology maps
6.5. 6.5 Basic 5620 SAM topology map procedures
6.5.1. Procedure 61 To open a map from the 5620 SAM main menu
6.5.2. Procedure 62 To open a service topology map
6.5.3. Procedure 63 To open an MPLS provisioned path map from the MPLS Path form
6.5.4. Procedure 64 To open a dynamic LSP path map from the LSP Path form
6.5.5. Procedure 65 To open a flat map
6.5.6. Procedure 66 To open a dynamic LSP crossconnect topology map
6.5.7. Procedure 67 To view and understand map elements
6.5.8. Procedure 68 To save a map to a file
6.5.9. Procedure 69 To view object information from a map
6.5.10. Procedure 610 To manage the topology map window
6.5.11. Procedure 611 To zoom in and zoom out on a map
6.5.12. Procedure 612 To display only selected map objects
6.5.13. Procedure 613 To display only highlighted map objects
6.6. 6.6 5620 SAM topology map configuration procedures
6.6.1. Procedure 614 To create an information table configuration
6.6.2. Procedure 615 To enable or disable a global information table
6.6.3. Procedure 616 To enable or disable a selected information table
6.6.4. Procedure 617 To reenable or disable map highlights
6.6.5. Procedure 618 To enable or disable a highlight information table
6.6.6. Procedure 619 To delete a map highlight
6.6.7. Procedure 620 To create a map filter
6.6.8. Procedure 621 To load and apply a saved filter to a topology map
6.6.9. Procedure 622 To autolayout icons on a map
6.6.10. Procedure 623 To search for a specific network object
6.6.11. Procedure 624 To create a bookmark
6.6.12. Procedure 625 To manage bookmarks
6.6.13. Procedure 626 To change the map background image
6.7. 6.7 5620 SAM topology map management procedures
6.7.1. Procedure 627 To use OAM diagnostic functions on service topology and composite service flat topology maps
6.7.2. Procedure 628 To create an equipment group
6.7.3. Procedure 629 To populate an equipment group
6.7.4. Procedure 630 To create a copy of an equipment group
6.7.5. Procedure 631 To delete an equipment group
6.7.6. Procedure 632 To manage NEs in equipment groups on the map
6.7.7. Procedure 633 To modify a service from the topology view
6.7.8. Procedure 634 To create a physical link
6.7.9. Procedure 635 To create a radio link
6.7.10. Procedure 636 To create a copy of a physical link
6.7.11. Procedure 637 To manage bandwidth availability on physical links
6.7.12. Procedure 638 To manage link referencing
6.7.13. Procedure 639 To delete a physical link
6.7.14. Procedure 640 To view and modify a discovered physical link
7. 7 5620 SAMbased schedules
7.1. 7.1 5620 SAMbased schedules overview
7.1.1. Time zones and time stamps
7.1.2. 5620 SAMbased schedules
7.2. 7.2 Workflow to create and manage 5620 SAMbased schedules
7.3. 7.3 5620 SAMbased schedule procedures
7.3.1. Procedure 71 To configure a 5620 SAMbased schedule
7.3.2. Procedure 72 To associate a task with a 5620 SAMbased schedule
7.3.3. Procedure 73 To view scheduled tasks associated with a 5620 SAMbased schedule
7.3.4. Procedure 74 To assign a different user account to a 5620 SAMbased scheduled task
7.3.5. Procedure 75 To turn up or shut down a 5620 SAMbased scheduled task
7.3.6. Procedure 76 To immediately execute a 5620 SAMbased scheduled task
7.3.7. Procedure 77 To view the current status of a 5620 SAMbased scheduled task
7.3.8. Procedure 78 To modify a scheduled task on a 5620 SAM schedule
8. 8 5620 SAM applications
8.1. 8.1 5620 SAM applications overview
8.1.1. Browser connections
8.2. 8.2 5620 SAM applications
8.3. 8.3 Procedures to manage 5620 SAM applications
8.3.1. Procedure 81 To set the browser path
Getting started
1 What’s new?
2 5620 SAM system overview
3 5620 SAM GUI overview
4 5620 SAM custom workspaces
5 5620 SAM navigation tree
6 5620 SAM topology map management
7 5620 SAMbased schedules
8 5620 SAM applications
1. 1 — What’s new?
1.1 What’s new in 5620 SAM Release 13.0

1.1 What’s new in 5620 SAM Release 13.0
This section highlights new features for 5620 SAM Release 13.0 and provides pointers into the documentation for more information.
New features and enhancements for this release are also described in the following guides:
5620 SAM XML OSS Interface Developer Guide
5620 SAM Wireless OSS Interface Developer Guide
5620 SAM LTE EPC User Guide
5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide
5620 SAM Optical User Guide
5620 SAM MPR User Guide
5650 CPAM User Guide
5620 SAMNV User Guide
The 5620 SAM Release Description and 5620 SAM Wireless Release Description provide Committed and Candidate feature lists for the entire 13.0 Release. The release
description documents not only include the NMS features and nodal features that are documented in 5620 SAM customer documentation, they also identify the nodal features
supported by the 5620 SAM but documented in the NE customer documentation.

Maintenance releases
Some maintenance releases may not be listed in this section, either because no new features are introduced or the features introduced do not require documentation.

What’s new in 5620 SAM Release 13.0 R5
Table 11 lists the features added in 5620 SAM Release 13.0 R5 and described in 5620 SAM core customer documentation.
Table 11 5620 SAM Release 13.0 R5 features
Feature Feature or Description See
ID function

5620 SAM applications enhancements

SAM System Monitor The System Monitor application provides a view of the overall status of 5620 SAM system Chapter 8
56562 components such as main servers, auxiliary servers, and 5620 SAM databases.
The application display also includes a number of component throughput and resource usage
KPIs.

Device management enhancements

SAM IPv6only You can discover and manage an NE using only IPv6 addresses. To manage an IPv6 node, Procedure 1111
28268 management create a discovery rule that specifies the management protocol as IPv6, and a rule element
specifying an IPv6 management address.

SAM Out of band You can enable out of band Ethernet management redundancy on an SROS node using the Procedure 104
47563 management Management Ethernet Redundancy parameter. When the parameter is enabled, the active
resiliency CPM can use the management Ethernet port of the standby CPM for system management
when the active port is down.

SAM RFE 185340: You can specify a domain name or an IPv4 or IPv6 address for the Initial Registration or “To perform CMPv2
56476 SubjectAltName Certificate Request for CMPv2 action types under the Admin Certificate in the Site Security actions” procedure in the
support for CMPv2 Public Key Infrastructure configuration. 5620 SAM System
IPv6 addresses are supported for the Admin Certificate Generate Local Certificate Request. Administrator Guide
“To configure and manage
PKI site security on an
NE” procedure in the 5620
SAM System
Administrator Guide

SAM Support for 7210 The 5620 SAM supports management of the 7210 SASMxp, Release 8.0 R1 or later. —
60733 SASMxp Support is similar to other 7210 SAS network (MPLSenabled) NEs.

5620 SAM system management enhancements

SAM Priority of on When a 5620 SAM operator initiates an ondemand NE configuration backup, the ondemand Chapter 24
37646 demand NE backup takes precedence over any scheduled NE backups that are in progress, and is
backups over performed as soon as the required resources are available.
scheduled activity

SAM Automatic CRL You can configure a certificate authority profile to automatically download CRL files from a Chapter 3 in the 5620
48267 download specified source, and trigger a file download manually. SAM System
Administrator Guide

SAM Software upgrade The activation function defined in an NE software upgrade policy is fully decoupled from the Chapter 27
49439 policy software download and NE reboot functions. This enhancement allows the download,
enhancements activation, and reboot to be performed as separate operations using separate schedules, if
required.
The actions that the 5620 SAM performs during the activation phase of an NE software
upgrade are the following:
backs up the original boot.ldr file
synchronizes the redundant CPMs, if applicable
updates the software image location in the BOF

SAM Dynamic system You can configure the 5620 SAM to react automatically when the IP address of a 7705 SAR Section 9.8
55878 IP address updates node changes, and adjust to use the new IP address for communication and for SDPs “To enable dynamic
for 7705 SAR destined for the node. system IP address
nodes updates for 7705 SAR
nodes” procedure in the
5620 SAM System
Administrator Guide

SAM AA IPDR You can configure redundant, common destinations for the collected AA accounting and AA “5620 SAM system
59683 enhancements Cflowd statistics to minimize data loss in the event of a 5620 SAM main, auxiliary, or Cflowd redundancy” chapter in the
auxiliary server failure. 5620 SAM System
Administrator Guide

7210 SASD enhancements

SAM Symmetric QoS for The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of a MIP LTR priority value on the 7210 SASD, Procedure 892
40271 OAM Release 7.0 R6 or later. MIP LTR Priority
The MIP LTR priority defines the CoS marking for LTRs in an ETHCFM linktrace test. You parameter in the 5620
can configure the value for a MEG, or for specific service sites in a MEG. When configured SAM Parameter Search
for a MEG, the CoS value is used by all supporting MIPs and MEPs in the MEG. Tool

SAM Egress policing per The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of egress meters for SAPs on all service types Section 68.9
60738 SAP (except mirror services) on the 7210 SASD, Release 8.0 R1 or later. Egress meters are Procedures 1433, 7423,
enabled using the global system resource profile for the NE. 7531, 7630, and 7776

7210 SASK enhancements

SAM Symmetric QoS for The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of a MIP LTR priority value on the 7210 SASK, Procedure 892

SAM 7210 SASK L2 and The 5620 SAM supports the following on the 7210 SASK, Release 8.0 R1 or later: Procedures 171, 758,
60748 QoS 802.1x and RADIUS server policies on ports and 7528
STP for VPLS sites
STP, BPDU and L2 Protocol Termination for VPLS L2 access interfaces
L2 MVPLS (without MVR or IGMP Snooping)
IPv6 Match Criteria for 7210 SAP access ingress policies

SAM SAP egress policy The 5620 SAM supports the assignment of SAP access egress QoS policies on mirror Procedure 916
64198 attachment to destination L2 interfaces on the 7210 SASK, Release 7.0 R4 or later. The interfaces must
access mirroring be on access ports; L2 uplink ports are not supported.
SAP

SAM DSCP remarking The 5620 SAM supports the assignment of DSCP and DOT1PDSCP remarking policies to Procedure 4932
63736 support for the 7210 SAP access egress policies.
7210 SASK 7210 SAP access egress policies with DSCP remarking are supported on the 7210 SASK,
Release 8.0 R1 or later.

SAM DEI classification The 5620 SAM supports ingress DEI classification on the 7210 SASK. You can enable or Procedures 492 and 498
64364 and marking disable DEI for ingress FCs in:
access ingress policies assigned to the 7210 SASK, Release 7.0 R7 or later.
network policies (of port type) assigned to the 7210 SASK, Release 7.0 R6 or later.

SAM G8032 without The 5620 SAM supports G8032 MEPs on the 7210 SASK, Release 8.0 R1 or later. Procedures 358 and 35
64368 CCMs 10

7210 SASM enhancements

SAM Symmetric QoS for The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of a MIP LTR priority value on the 7210 SASM, Procedure 892

SAM LDP LFA with The 5620 SAM supports LDP FRR with loopfree alternate for OSPF and ISIS in base Chapter 29
60735 policies, LDP FRR, routing instances on the 7210 SASM (in network mode), Release 8.0 R1or later. LFA
OSPF/ISIS LFA exclusions and BFD tracking are also supported. LDP FRR for OSPF in VPRN routing
instances is also supported.

60738 SAP (except mirror services) on the 7210 SASM, Release 8.0 R1 or later. Egress meters are Procedures 1433, 7423,

SAM Edge PIC for L3 The 5620 SAM supports BGP backup on base routing instances and VPRN routing Chapter 29
60740 VPN routes (BGP instances on the 7210 SASM (in network mode), Release 8.0 R1 or later. IPv4 and IPv6 are
FRR) supported.

7210 SASMxp enhancements

SAM Support for 7210 The 5620 SAM supports management of the 7210 SASMxp, Release 8.0 R1 or later. —
60733 SASMxp Support is similar to other 7210 SAS network (MPLSenabled) NEs.

7210 SASR enhancements

SAM Symmetric QoS for The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of a MIP LTR priority value on the 7210 SASR, Procedure 892

60735 policies, LDP FRR, routing instances on the 7210 SASR, Release 8.0 R1or later. LFA exclusions and BFD
OSPF/ISIS LFA tracking are also supported. LDP FRR for OSPF in VPRN routing instances is also
supported.

60740 VPN routes (BGP instances on the 7210 SASR, Release 8.0 R1 or later. IPv4 and IPv6 are supported.
FRR)

SAM Ingress QoS The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of network ingress QoS resources in 7210 System Procedure 1434
60742 resources Resource Profile policies. Using a configured policy, system default network ingress QoS QoS Network Ingress
configuration for resources can be reallocated to other functions on the 7210 SASR, Release 8.0 R1 or later. parameter in the 5620
network ports and SAM Parameter Search
network IP Tool
interfaces

SAM Support egress The 5620 SAM supports Primary VLAN for egress MIPs on VPLS interfaces on the 7210 Procedures 1434, 7543
60744 MIP in a VPLS SASR, Release 8.0 R1 or later. The system resource profile policy assigned to the card slot Chapter 89
service and must allocate resources to bidirectional MIP egress. Only secondgeneration IMM cards are
Primary VLAN supported.

SAM IPv6 for OOB port The 5620 SAM supports IPv6 for outofband management of the 7210 SASR, Release 8.0 Section 10.1
60754 on 7210 SASR R1 or later.

7210 SAST enhancements

SAM Symmetric QoS for The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of a MIP LTR priority value on the 7210 SAST, Procedure 892

60735 policies, LDP FRR, routing instances on the 7210 SAST (in network mode), Release 8.0 R1or later. LFA
OSPF/ISIS LFA exclusions and BFD tracking are also supported. LDP FRR for OSPF in VPRN routing
instances is also supported.

60738 SAP (except mirror services) on the 7210 SAST, Release 8.0 R1 or later. Egress meters are Procedures 1433, 7423,

SAM IPv4 multicast on The 5620 SAM supports IPv4 multicast on the 7210 SAST (in network mode), release 8.0 Chapter 29
60750 7210 SAST R1 or later. IGMP and PIM are supported on base routing instances.

7210 SASX enhancements

SAM Symmetric QoS for The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of a MIP LTR priority value on the 7210 SASX, Procedure 892

60735 policies, LDP FRR, routing instances on the 7210 SASX, Release 8.0 R1or later. LFA exclusions and BFD
OSPF/ISIS LFA tracking are also supported. LDP FRR for OSPF in VPRN routing instances is also
supported.

60740 VPN routes (BGP instances on the 7210 SASX, Release 8.0 R1 or later. IPv4 and IPv6 are supported.
FRR)
FRR)

SAM Support L2PT The 5620 SAM supports L2PT for VPLS and MVPLS SAPs and spoke SDPs on the 7210 Procedures 7533, 7553
60752 SASX, Release 8.0 R1 or later.
For BVPLS, L2PT is supported for SAPs only.

7450 ESS and 7750 SR enhancements

SAM 2048 kHz BITS A CPM5 can be configured to use a 2048kHzG703 interface for BITS/BITS1. Procedure 168
61476 signals on CPM5

SAM ITUT G.8275.1 You can configure an IEEE 1588 PTP clock to use the ITU G.8275.1 profile, and configure Procedure 1618
47609 PTP clock profile clock priorities for PTP clocks, ports, and peers.

7705 SAR enhancements (includes all 7705 SAR devices)

SAM MLD snooping in You can configure MLD snooping at the site, SAP, spokeSDP, and meshSDP levels for Procedures 7522, 7546,
56723 VPLS VPLS, RVPLS and MVPLS services on the 7705 SAR, Release 7.0 R3. and 7558

SAM IPv6 unicast in R You can bind an IPv6 filter to an L3 access interface for IES and VPRN services under a Procedures 757, 7627,
56862 VPLS routed VPLS, on the 7705 SAR, Release 7.0 R3. and 7783

7950 XRS enhancements

— APEQ configuration You can provision additional supported APEQ types, and configure the input power mode of a Procedures 1626 and 16
provisioned APEQ. 27

OmniSwitch enhancements

SAM OS 6900 VC The 5620 SAM supports the discovery of OS 6900 virtual chassis nodes. Chapter 9
39909 support

Network management enhancements

CPAM OTS associations Optical Transport Services (OTS) can be discovered when performing service tunnel Chapter 35
1821 with LDPbased discovery on an LDPbased service.
services

SAM AA Cflowd group You can use the 5620 SAM to configure an AA Cflowd group policy that is applied to one or Chapter 85
40349 policy more AA sites. Using an AA Cflowd group policy facilitates the distribution of Cflowd
configuration updates.
Additionally, you can use the 5620 SAM policy sync group function to synchronize, compare,
and audit AA Cflowd group policies between and among member AA groups or partitions.

SAM Filterbased Forward (Redirect Filter) action added to filter entry on ACL IP filter policy. Allows filter Procedures 502, 2810,
47725 residential traffic based traffic steering to a value added service (VAS). 7625, and 7769
steering for ESM VAS Interface Type configuration on IES and VPRN L3 access interface and network

interface.

SAM Access and hybrid You can create a LAG with a mix of access, hybrid, and network ports with a port weight Procedure 1512
47557 mixed LAG support speed of 10.

Enhanced mixed You can create a LAG with a mix of 1G and 10G ports, with a port weight speed of 1; or a Procedure 1512
LAG support mix of 10G, 40G, and 100G ports with a port weight speed of 10.

Use LAG Port The Use LAG Port Weight parameter can be configured on IGMP, MLD, and PIM interfaces; —
Weight support multicast MCAC policies; and VPLS, VPRN, and VRRP services.

Weight mode You can configure the internal schedule weight mode adjustment on advanced configuration —
adjustment policies and supported cards.

SAM DHCP full proxy Relay Proxy configuration on IES and VPRN subscriber interfaces and group interfaces. Procedures 7617, 7614,
47729 Enhances the DHCPv4 relay function: relay proxy acts as a server towards the client, 7722, and 7731
replacing server identifier value with its own address.

SAM IPv6 IAPD Supported on VPRN and IES retail subscriber interface and wholesale group interface. PD Procedures 7722 and 76
47740 managed route with Managed Next Hop configuration with IPv4 and IPv6 options on VPRN and IES group 17
IPv4 host nexthop interface.

SAM DHCP6 server Functionality to send alarms if local DHCPv6 server address pool or subnet available Procedures 283 and 77
47743 address utilization addresses fall below a configured threshold, or are exhausted. 21
threshold and trap

SAM DHCPv4/v6 server Lease Hold Time configuration added to local DHCPv4/v6 server. User Identification Method Procedures 282, 283, 77
47745 extensions configuration added to local DHCPv4 server. NAK Non Matching Subnet configuration added 20, and 7721
to local DHCPv4/v6 server pool. Applies to base and VPRN routing instances.
Extensions allow lease and prefix allocation to 4G small cell devices, instead of ESM
subscribers.

SAM DHCPv6 server Allow lease query configuration enables local DHCPv6 server to handle and reply to lease Procedures 283 and 77
47747 lease query support query messages. Configurable on local DHCPv6 server on base and VPRN routing 21
instances.

SAM DHCPv6 client To support IPv6 migrant users and DSM users, an IPv6 pool manager with internal DHCPv6 "IPv6 pool manager"
47749 client is configurable on IES and VPRN subscriber interfaces (Procedures 7614 and 7731). "Workflow to configure
Virtual chassis ID configuration allows WLAN GW data redundancy across host NEs distributed subscriber
(Procedure 7731). management"

SAM RIP/RIPng listener IES and VPRN subscriber interface and group interface can be assigned as RIP listener "RIP and RIPng"
47755 on subscriber interface. New RIP policy object configurable on static hosts and local user database Procedures 2911, 6229,
interface PPP/IPoE hosts. 726, 727, and 7220

SAM 1:1 Stateful Nonmultichassis tunnel ID range configuration on NE. L2TP MC sync option on MC peer Procedures 1423, 421,
47761 redundancy for group. Track SRRP object configuration on MC peer. and 422
LAC with MCS
based
synchronization

SAM Static IPv6 host IPv6 static host configuration with MAC learning option on IES and VPRN group interface Procedures 7220, 7617,
47775 SAPs. IPv6 auto reply configuration (router/neighbor solicitation) on IES/VPRN group and 7722
interfaces.

SAM DHCPv6 double DHCPv6 double relay support, including: Procedures 507, 7617,
47777 relay DHCPv6 filter policy object 7618, 7722, and 7723
IPv6 default host configuration on IES and VPRN SAPs.
IPv6 address support on IES and VPRN subscriber interfaces
DHCPv6 snooping configuration on IES and VPRN group interfaces.

SAM Static agnostic 1:1 Applicationagnostic configuration option on NAT pools. "NAT pools"
47797 NAT Procedure 314

SAM Intrachassis Intrachassis ActiveActive redundancy (instead of ActiveStandby) with automatic traffic Procedure 311
47793 ActiveActive redistribution upon MDA failure. Redundancy and failed MDA limit configuration added to
redundancy ISANAT group.

SAM Dual stack support Additional configuration for various 5620 SAM objects to accommodate IPv6 on distributed "Distributed subscriber
47807 for DSM hosts subscriber management hosts. management"
New accounting RADIUS attributes (IPv6 Address, Framed IPv6 Prefix, Framed Interface "Workflow to configure
ID, DHCPv6 Options) and new authentication RADIUS attributes (IPv6 Address, DHCPv6 distributed subscriber
Options) on ISA RADIUS policy. (Procedure 569) management"
IPv6 address support on forwarding entries for HTTP redirect policy. (Procedure 6221)

IPv6 filter entry support and unique IPv6 filter action on distributed subscriber management
IP filter policy. (Procedure 6225)
Idle timeout action, SLAAChost lifetime, and DHCPv6 host lifetime configuration on VLAN
tag range on IES and VPRN soft GRE group interface. (Procedures 7620 and 7748)
Upstream and downstream IPv4 and IPv6 filter policy configuration on outside NAT
configuration. (Procedure 314)
TCP maximum segment size adjustment configuration for WLAN GW configuration on
VPRN site. (Procedure 7747)

SAM BFD support on You can assign a BFD template to dynamic LSPs, dynamic LSP path bindings, and LSP Procedures 327, 328,
47832 LSP template MVPN. The BFD template can only be assigned to the primary path, and not to the and 3223
secondary or standby paths. The BFD template can be assigned to either the LSP path
binding or the LSP, but not both at the same time.
BFD templates assigned to a LSP template MVPN are supported for One Hop P2P LSP and
Mesh P2P LSP types, but not to the P2MP LSP type.

SAM IPv6 Support: dual You can configure both local and remote IPv4 and IPv6 addresses for IPsec security policy Procedure 365
48245 stack security entries of a VPRN service.
policy entry

SAM GMPLSUNI GMPLS LSP supports working and protecting paths. To enable protection on an LSP, you Procedure 345
50640 can set the E2E Protection parameter to OnetoMany, and add one protected path and
multiple working paths.
You can add only one member gLSP to the tunnel group endpoint when you set the Mode
parameter to ActiveStandby.

SAM Querybased MIB Ondemand retrieval of WLAN GW UEs from an NE. Procedure 7217
53162 for WLAN GW UEs

SAM Duplicate segment You can view segment routing SIDs, including duplicate IDs, in the network using the Procedure 132
54381 routing SIDs network resources form. When a duplicate ID is detected, an alarm is raised.

ISIS and OSPF You can configure the transport type of a tunnel selection profile as SRISIS or SROSPF. Procedure 771
segment routing for When configuring automatic SDP binding on a VPRN or VPLS service, you now specify a
tunnel selection tunnel selection profile instead of a tunnel type.
profiles

SAM EVPN ARP/ND EVPN VPLS is enhanced in the following areas: Procedures 7517 and 75
57703 snooping support – Proxy ARP and proxy ND for VPLS 18
Dynamic Proxy Dynamic, static, and EVPN proxy ARP and proxy ND entries
ARP/ND Support
(Includes Static
ProxyND)

SAM RFE 198081: A new CFLOWD option allows CFLOWD to export flow data using interface indexes. Procedure 147
59132 CFLOWD and Specifically, if the IF Index Context parameter is set to Virtual router IF Index, the ingress
indexes and egress fields in IP flow templates are populated with the IFMIB IFindex. If the
parameter is set to Global IF Index, the behaviour is same as before in that ingress and
egress fields are populated using the global IFIndex (vRtrIfGlobalIndex).

SAM RFE 200932: Ignore donotfragment bit option on local user database PPP host. Specifies if the DF bit Procedure 727
59136 Ignore donot should be ignored on subscriber/group interfaces.
fragment bit

SAM Service searching Service navigation trees for access interfaces, subscriber SAPs, spoke SDP bindings, and Procedure 311
60083 and listing mesh SDP bindings display a maximum of 50 objects at a time.
improvement When this limit is reached, you can click on the parent object under which the objects are
Extension to SDP listed to open a tab with the full list of objects.
and composite
services

SAM NGE statistics NGE statistics are available for viewing and collection from the Statistics tab of the following Chapter 80
64317 support object properties forms:
card slot
daughter card slot
VPRN spoke SDP binding

Protocol enhancements

SAM Multicast CAC for Multicast CAC configuration for MLD interface on base or VPRN routing instance. Multicast "Multicast CAC policies"
45606 MLD CAC configuration for MLD group interface on base or VPRN routing instance. Procedures 2965 and 29
67

SAM Weighted Random New Weighted Random option for Session Assign Method on L2TP site and L2TP tunnel Procedure 2938
47781 session assign group profile (base and VPRN routing instances). Supports largescale L2TP networks with
option large numbers of LACs and LNSs.

SAM Segment routing— You can enable the remote LFA nexthop calculation by IGP LFA SPF on ISIS, OSPFv2, Procedures 2923 and 29
48104 single OSPF and OSPFv3 sites. 28
instance, LFA, link
protect Remote
LFA

SAM 1:1 stateful Failover SRRP peer configuration on L2TP site on base and VPRN routing instance. Failover Procedure 2938
50634 redundancy for recovery configuration on L2TP site, as well as all tunnel group profiles and tunnel profiles on
LAC with L2TP the site.
failover extensions

SAM Segment routing for You can configure segment routing parameters on the Behavior tab of OSPF interfaces, and Segment routing in
55276 multiple OSPF configure SDPs and VPRNs to allow service binding to segment routing tunnels created by Chapter 29, and
instances OSPF or ISIS. Procedure 2934

SAM Purge originator You can configure an ISIS instance to record the identity of the IS that generates a purge Procedure 2923
55320 identification TLV using the Purge Originator Identification TLV parameter on the Behavior tab of ISIS instances
for ISIS on base routers and in VPRN services.

SAM Ignore narrow You can configure an ISIS interface to ignore links with narrow metrics when wide metrics Procedure 2927
56482 metrics for ISIS support has been enabled.

SAM RFE 198574: WPP Retry options for NTF logout messages added to Web portal configuration on base and Procedure 2971
59530 triggered hosts VPRN routing instances. Clear commands for hanging WPP hosts.

Policy enhancements

SAM IPv4IPv6 The 5620 SAM policy functionality is enhanced to fully enable IPv6 applicability. Chapter 48
28268 equivalency: IPv6
only management

SAM GX: Traffic Flow Shared PCC Rule Start Entry and Count configuration on ACL IP filter policy and ACL IPv6 Procedures 491, 493, 50
47757 Template support filter policy. Dynamic policer configuration on SAP access ingress and SAP access egress 3, and 504
policies.

SAM PCP standard PCP server implementation enhanced to conform to RFC 6887. Minimum and maximum Procedure 651
47791 compliance (RFC PCP version number configuration added to PCP policy.
6887)

SAM Redirect policy The Redirect Filter policy is enhanced to support a configurable option to prevent CPM from Procedure 508
47855 enhancement changing the active destination used by a forwardredirect policy action. The “No Sticky
sticky destination Destination” and associated “Hold Time Up” parameters thereby provide a degree of
support stickiness for the selected destination.

SAM CTL plane support An operator can now specify a direct or indirect nexthop IP address and the target VRF Procedures 502 and 503
47857 for action forward instance for a PBR action in an IP/IPv6 ACL filter policy. A "forward Next Hop (Router)"
nexthop redirect: option is introduced for Actions. When selected, two new tabs are displayed: "Next Hop
CLI/SNMP/OF filter Routing" and "Forwarding Router Instance Detail", where the nexthop IP address and router
policy programming can be configured.

SAM Forward to ESI Support for an integrated Nuage and SROS router service chaining solution for IES and Procedure 503
47871 action support for VPRN services is introduced. A "forward (ESI)" option is introduced for Actions in ACL IPv6
Nuage service filter policies. When selected, a new "Forwarding ESI Details" tab and "PBR Down Action"
chaining parameter are displayed to allow configuration.

SAM TTL conditional TTL/HopLimit match support is introduced in the ingress filter policy for the "drop" action. Procedure 502
47878 action in filter Greaterthan, lessthan, equal to, and range operators are supported with the TTL/HopLimit
policy support: condition. The TimeToLive Option parameter is added to the IP ACL filter policy.
IPv4 ACLs

SAM Queue depth The depth of a queue can now be monitored over time through configuration of the new Procedures 179 and 49
47888 monitoring Monitor Queue Depth parameter. The depth of SAP queues in all services are monitorable, 47
including access ingress, access egress, and network port queue group queues.

SAM Consistent The configurable value for the Packet Byte Offset parameter is increased to 64 bytes in Chapter 49
47892 maximum packet policies, services, and associated overrides for egress queues, egress queue group queues,
byteoffset subtract egress HSMDA queues, egress HSMDA queue group queues, egress policers, and network
(64) on egress HSMDA queues.

SAM Vport stats Congestion monitoring under the Egress Port Scheduler (EPS) for Ethernet ports and Procedure 171
47906 Ethernet Vports is introduced. The Monitor Threshold and Collect Stats parameters are
added to the Port Scheduler policy.

SAM Route Policy Parameterization in a routing policy is extended to allow additional policy variables to be Procedure 531
47908 Variable Action expanded in subpolicy action items. The following action items now support policy variables:
Items aigpmetric, aspathprepend, localpreference, metric, nexthop, damping, origin, preference,
tag, and type.

SAM BUM classification Support has been added to allow ingress QoS control of broadcast, unknown, and multicast Procedure 497
47996 for PW QoS (BUM) traffic received on a spoke or mesh SDP within a VPLS. The new Broadcast Policer
ID and Unknown Policer ID parameters are added to the existing redirect function in a QoS
network policy.

SAM Routing statement You can configure a conditional expression on policy statement entries for a routing policy to Procedure 531
48026 conditional restrict evaluated routes based on a prefix list.
expressions

SAM IPv6 MCAC with The existing MCAC policy is enhanced by adding support for IPv6 MCAC policies, including Procedure 531
48070 source awareness source awareness. The IPv6 MCAC is supported for PIM and MLD. A user can now
configure a channel with an IPv6 multicast address and the source prefix with an IPv6
unicast address.

SAM ECMP support for The Routing Policy Statement is enhanced to support a new labelperprefix (LPP) mode Procedure 531
48148 label per prefix when an IP route is exported from a VRF into the core MPBGP domain. A new parameter
routes in a VPRN
named Advertise Label is added to the default action whose value is either None or Pre
Prefix.

SAM Display the content An operator can open a standalone Committed Values form to view contents of local policy Procedure 4811
49335 of the Policy definitions for various policy types. In addition, the operator can also open a Modified Values
and form to review any changes made to a local policy before committing them.
SAM
62009

SAM MG: Virtualized To support Virtualized Mobile Gateway functionality, a new chassis type called VSR is Procedures 5010 and 53
50329 Mobile Gateway introduced, along with card types iomv and ismmgv, and MDA type isamsv. Policy 4
support for the VSR chassis is introduced.

SAM BGP Flowspec The Routing Statement policy is enhanced to allow a Source Prefix List Name and Procedure 531
52075 enhancement: Destination Prefix List Name to be added to each policy entry’s From Criteria.
policy matching
flowspec attributes
source and
destination IP

SAM Gx CCRT replay Credit control request interval configuration on diameter application policy, Gx application. Procedure 6223
52943

SAM SHCV policy New SHCV policy object, configurable on VPRN group interface and L3 access interface, "SHCV policies"
54649 and on IES group interface and L3 access interface. Procedures 6228, 7640,
7617, 7722, and 7786

SAM Video ISA Existing functionality of the Video ISA is enhanced with the addition of two new attributes: Procedures 159 and 515
56457 enhancements Retransmission for Client and FCC Session Timeout.

SAM Ingress filter Ingress IP and/or IPv6 template filter policies on interAS and intraAS network ports for any Procedure 7737
59044 policies on VPRN label type in VPRN services are supported. The filter policy is applied to unicast traffic
network interfaces arriving on all network interfaces for that VPRN.
support with label
per prefix mode

SAM CBS and MBS The 5620 SAM supports user configuration of burst size units (kilobits, bytes, or kilobytes) Procedures 492, 498,
60746 values for meters in for ingress meters during meter configuration in 7210 SAP access ingress policies and 7210 and 4948
kilobytes network policies, and for ingress meter overrides on L2 and L3 access interfaces. The
configuration is supported on 7210 SAS NEs (except the 7210 SASE and 7210 SASK),
Release 8.0 R1 or later.

Service management enhancements

SAM DNS in SLAAC You can configure up to four RDNSS servers and associated parameters on base routing Procedures 281, 2810,
28266 instances, network interfaces, VPRN services, and VPRN L3 interfaces. 2811, and 7797

SAM IPv4IPv6 The 5620 SAM supports IPv6 on all applications, including services, routing, OAM, and —
28268 equivalence: IPv6 policies.
only management

SAM MPLSTP: Lock The 5620 SAM supports a new service throughput configuration, which allows test traffic to Procedure 942
28274 Instruct/Loopback be injected into a VLL service to test MPLSTP based service tunnels.

SAM L2 SAP copy/move The 5620 SAM supports the following enhancements to L2 SAP copy/move: Section 17.2
46386 MEPs associated with SAPs are copied/moved with L2 SAP copy/move Procedures 175, 891, 89
endpoints associated with SAPs are copied/moved with L2 SAP copy/move 2
if the source SAP MEP has associated CFM tests, for a SAP move, the CFM tests
are created with the new MEP

SAM Display content of An operator can open a standalone Committed Values form to view the contents of a VPLS Procedures 7596 and 77
46646 a Service or VPRN service. This includes all policies used in the service, such as import, export, QoS 65
and SAP ingress, and QoS SAP egress policies. In addition, the operator can also open a
SAM Modified Values form to review any changes made to a service before committing them.
62009

SAM Hashing on Inner You can configure the use of the inner IPv4 or IPv6 header for hashing of IPv4 and IPv6 Procedures 2811, 7625
47962 IP unicast and multicast traffic that is encapsulated for traffic distribution over LAG links or and 7728
ECMP.
The inner IP can be set using the existing Egress IP Load Balancing parameter on:
IES and VPRN L3 access interfaces
VPRN network interfaces
base network interfaces

SAM TEID hashing for TEID load balancing is supported on VPLS and MVPLS service sites and on VPLS and Procedures 757 and 75
47970 LAG/ECMP in a MVPLS ISites. 80
VPLS service TEID load balancing allows NEs to use a TEID value from a GTP v1/v2 packet header in

hash inputs in addition to L3 or L4 IP inputs for better traffic distribution across multiple
ECMP paths or LAG links.

SAM CPE checks for You can enable and configure CPE checks on static routes that use IPv6 addresses. Procedure 288
48000 IPv6 static routes

SAM Prefix prioritization You can specify a prefix list for an OSPF area as high priority, and configure the RIB priority Procedures 2923, 2929,
48038 for FIB download of an OSPF interface on base routers and VPRN services. For ISIS sites, you can specify a and 2934
based on route tag prefix list or a tagged route as the prioritized route.

SAM Configured and You can configure a Configured and an Operational IP MTU on network interfaces on base Procedure 2811
48042 operational IP MTU routers and in VPRN services.
parameters

SAM IPv6 Neighbor and You can restrict the number of neighbor and ARP entries that can be learned on an interface Procedure 2811
48058 IPv4 ARP limits using the ARP Limit and IPv6 Neighbor Limit parameters.

SAM GRTtoVRF BGP BGP under VPRN supports RIB management for GRT import under both IPv4 and IPv6. Procedures 531 and 77
48064 Leaking 12

SAM Neighbor Discovery You can configure the Stale Time parameter on layer 3 access interfaces to specify how long Procedure 2811
a SROS node retains a neighbor cache entry that is in a stale state.
48076 stale timer
a SROS node retains a neighbor cache entry that is in a stale state.
48076 stale timer

SAM Unequal cost You can enable weighted ECMP on a routing instance, and configure load balancing weights Procedures 281, 327, 32
48116 MPLS multipath on dynamic LSPs and LSP Template MVPN policies. 23

SAM PBBEVPN support You can configure PBBEVPN parameters on Bsites in VPLS services, and configure Procedures 7571 and 75
48130 ethernet segments on network elements for use with a PBBEVPN. 72

SAM L2PT and STP L2PT and STP parameters can be configured on the Service PW Template policy form, under Procedure 811
48144 configuration on the General and STP tabs respectively.
PW Template
policies

SAM IP counters on R IP interface statistics are added to VPRN and IES interfaces associated with an RVPLS. 5620 SAM Statistics
48150 VPLS interfaces On both VPRN and IES services that have an interface associated with an RVPLS, the Management Guide
following statistics are added:
Interface Stats and Interface Additional Stats, which correspond to IFMIB stats
IP Interface Stats and IP Interface Additional Stats, which corresponds to vRTR
interface stats

SAM IPv6 Support: v6 IPv6 support on the v6 encapsulation for GRE / IPinIP tunnels. The changes are supported —
48174 encapsulation for on both IES and VPRN sites.
GRE / IPinIP L3 SAP (L3 Access Interface)—5620 SAM supports the changes to transport GRE
tunnels payload across IPv6 network. A publicside SAP linked to an ISA tunnelgroup is
configurable as an IPv6 interface with one or more global unicast IPv6 addresses.
Tunnel End Points—the source, remote IP and backup remote IP addresses in the
configuration of a GRE tunnel are configurable as IPv6 addresses.

SAM IPv6 Support: IPv6 is supported for IPsec tunnel encapsulation, which allows IPv4 or IPv6 traffic to be Procedures 367, 368, 36
48241 IPsec tunnel encapsulated in an IPv6 IPsec tunnel. IPv6 is supported on: 12, and 3613
encapsulation Local and peer gateway address, local ID, and destination IP of IPsec tunnel
Local gateway address and local ID of IPsec gateway
From Address, To Address, and Prefix on IPsec Traffic Selector List Entry
From Address and To Address on Remote User Traffic Selector
RADIUS attributes in IPsec Radius Accounting Policy

SAM IPv6 Support: dual The IPsec Remote User Security Association (Edit) form displays the second readonly Procedure 3614
48243 stack remote private IP address, type, and prefix length.
access private IP

SAM IPSec gateway You can configure an IPSec gateway to obtain an IP address from an external DHCPv4 Procedure 3613
48247 IPv4 address server. You can specify up to eight DHCP servers.
assignment using
external DHCP

SAM PKI certificate and You can reload the PKI certificate file and key file simultaneously by using the certkeypair 5620 SAM System
48255 key combined input file type under the Reload File action on the Site Security Public Key Infrastructure Administrator Guide,
reload form. Procedure 313

SAM RADIUS interim You can configure the update interval for RADIUS interimupdate messages on the IPSec Procedure 367
48259 update and Radius Accounting Policy form.
disconnect
messages

SAM Expiration warning The PKI on a node can be configured to create an alarm when a certificate or certificate 5620 SAM System
48270 alarms for PKI revoke list is close to expiring. You can specify how many hours before expiration the Administrator Guide,
certificates and warning appears, and how often it is repeated. Procedure 313
certificate revoke
lists

SAM Add RouteTarget The security requirement is to be able to protect certain secure customer VPNs from certain “To create or configure a
49040 to the range policy user communities, so that not all users can add sites to the secure VPN. range policy” procedure in
The RT range prevents users from creating communities with the restricted range. the 5620 SAM System
Administrator Guide

SAM Service Copy/Move The 5620 SAM service copy/move feature allows to you copy or move VPLS services, or Procedures 7446 and 75
50899 move VLL services, from one NE to another. 95

SAM FIPS1402 You can enable FIPS1402 on an NE on the Network Element properties form. Procedure 144
54647

SAM RFE 194464: BGP A minimum down timer has been added to the configuration of BGP multihoming sites on Procedures 142, 7411
55307 MH site minimum Epipe and VPLS services. and 7567
down timer

SAM ISIS and OSPF Transport tunnels and BGP shortcut tunnels on BGP sites can be configured to use ISIS and Procedure 293
55277 next hop resolution OSPF for next hop resolution.

SAM Maximum LSA You can limit the number of externallygenerated LSAs for an OSPF process by configuring Section 29.22
55322 limits for OSPF Router Advertisement LSA Limit parameters on OSPF Sites.
sites

SAM Delayenable for all Support for delayenable parameters is extended to the following IP interface types: Procedure 2811
56474 IP interface types Base routing network interface (GMPLS loopback, unnumbered, numbered)
VPRN L3 access interface, tunnel interface, subscriber interface, Redundant
interface, Network interface
IES L3 access interface, tunnel interface, subscriber interface, redundant interface
VPLS L2 management interface

SAM ICMP and ICMPv6 You can specify an IP address to be used for ICMP and ICMPv6 error messages sourced Procedure 281
56480 error message from a node in the Source Address tab of a routing instance.
source IP

SAM RFE 185718: Add Static route parameters can be configured on the base routing instance and VPRN routing Procedures 281 and 77
56486 Static Route hold instance to hold static routes that are flapping operationally down for increasing periods, up 14
down time option to the maximum hold down value. This configuration dampens the effects of an unstable
static route that is flapping due to either traffic or link instability.

SAM RFE 187673: You can configure an operational group to be monitored on a PW port binding under a service Procedure 352
56490 operational group tunnel.
support on PW port
support on PW port
The operational state of the PW port binding follows the operational state of the monitored
operational group. You can view the Operational Group Down state cause indicator on the
PW port binding properties form.

SAM RFE 197111 Antispoofing configuration with Next Hop IP and MAC address option on IES and VPRN SAM56494
56494 managed route soft GRE group interfaces, WLAN GW settings.
support for soft Unicast RPF configuration on IES and VPRN soft GRE group interfaces.
GRE group
interfaces

SAM Mrouter port from You can configure a routed VPLS site to allow multicast sources on the VPLS side of the Procedure 757
58667 VPLS to IP in R service to be forwarded to receivers on the IP side, with support for IGMP snooping.
VPLS

SAM GRE Spoke SDP Fragmentation can be enabled for GRE Spoke SDPs using the Allow Fragmentation Procedure 351
60812 fragmentation parameter when configuring an IP/MPLS service tunnel.

OAM and service testing enhancements

SAM Test Suite During autocreation of OAM tests (using STM test policies and test suites), the 5620 SAM Procedures 873 and 874
40117 Generator Logs would previously clear CFM Global MEG and MEP log errors when regenerating tests, since
improvement it could not differentiate between CFM object generation and test generation. The 5620 SAM
will now only clear logs created during test generation when regenerating tests.

SAM VXLAN OAM The VXLAN ping test is introduced to confirm that the Virtual Tunnel is operational in a VPLS Procedure 8822
47830 VXLAN configuration. It is also used to query the status of the Virtual Network Instance
(VNI). The test uses the echo request/reply functions to accomplish this.

SAM OAM support ldp The P2MP LSP Ping test now supports target type mLDPSSM (Label Distribution Protocol Procedure 8834
54506 ssm test SourceSpecific Multicast).

SAM RFE 191657: The ability to configure the Source UDP port of a TWAMPLight PM Session is added. The Procedure 908
55299 TWAMPLight : feature also expands the TWAMP Destination (Reflector) UDP port range to 165535.
SourceUDPPort
configuration
Option under IP

SAM RFE 140022: The packet size of an ICMP IPv6 ping test packet can now to be set to a specific size when Procedure 7740
56478 Configurable ping the CPE check option is configured for a static route.
size up to 1500
Bytes for static
cpecheck IPv6

SAM RFE 197962: Locallygenerated ETHCFM PDUs from UP MEPs, vMEPs, and MIPs, can now utilize TEP Procedure 8822
59048 VxLAN ETHCFM: and VTEP connections as transport for evpn services. Configurable parameter CFM MAC
Support Advertisement is added to BGP EVPN.
Transmission
Across VTEP
Connection

SAM OAMPM 5min Support has been added for a five minute Measurement Interval under the OAMPM Session Procedure 901
60689 Measurement configuration.
Interval Support

SAM Light weight The new TWAMP and TWAMPLight Control Client (TCC) performance Monitoring test is Procedure 908
62255 session controller introduced. The TCC test allows the 5620 SAM to act like TWAMP from one test end and
in 5620 SAM for TWAMPLight from the other end. This allows the 7x50 TWL sender (OAMPM) to be run
TWAMP and against any regular TWAMP implementation on a variety of NEs.
TWAMPLight

5620 SAM documentation enhancements

SAM 5620 SAMO IPDR The 5620 SAM onproduct documentation includes the 5620 SAMO IPDR Reference, which 5620 SAMO IPDR
59683 Reference is a tool for OSS developers to view the IP detail record, or IPDR, statistics types and Reference in the on
SAM
counters. product documentation
65415 The tool includes the AA accounting, AA Cflowd, and AA network performance statistics page
information.

— 5620 SAM A list of the 5620 SAM applications and 5620 SAM browser support and configuration can be Chapter 8
applications found in the 5620 SAM User Guide. 5620 SAM System
documentation System administrator tasks related to user security, supervision settings, and system Administrator Guide
preferences can be found in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide.

Feature Feature or function Description See
ID

7210 SASD enhancements

SAM Fault propagation LLF The 5620 SAM supports operational groups for fault propagation for VLANs on the 7210 SASD, Procedures 146
40273 with dot1q/QinQ SAPs Release 7.0 R1 or later. Ports with null, dot1q, and QinQ encapsulation can be associated with and 171
on access ports operational groups.

SAM Support IP and MAC The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of MAC and IPv4/IPv6 match criteria within the same Procedure 492
42067 criteria for SAP ingress SAP access ingress policy for the 7210 SASD, Release 7.0 R1 or later.
QoS classification

SAM SAP ingress QoS The 5620 SAM supports IP Precedence classification for IP and IPv6 match criteria, in SAP Procedure 492
42075 classification using IP access ingress policies for the 7210 SASD, Release 7.0 R1 or later.
precedence

SAM Configure Ethertype for The 5620 SAM supports Ethertype configuration for access and hybrid ports that use dot1q Procedure 171
42087 dot1q tag encapsulation on the 7210 SASD, Release 7.0 R4 or later. You can configure hexadecimal or
decimal values.

SAM MIP Creation using The 5620 SAM supports MIP creation for VPLS SAPs and SDPs on the 7210 SASD, Release Procedures 75
60667 default mode for VPLS 7.0 R4 or later. 43 and 7556

SAM DMM interoperability for The 5620 SAM supports enabling DMM interoperability for CFM on the 7210 SASD and 7210 Procedure 1430
63380 CFM SASD ETR, Release 7.0 R6 or later.

7210 SASE enhancements

SAM 1830 VWM The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of DWDM shelf types for VWM modules. Passive Procedure 162
49047 Enhancement DWDM shelves are supported on the 7210 SASE, Release 7.0 R4 or later. Active DWDM
shelves and alarms are supported on the 7210 SASE, Release 7.0 R5 or later.

7210 SASK enhancements

42067 criteria for SAP ingress SAP access ingress policy for the 7210 SASK, Release 7.0 R1 or later.
QoS classification

42087 dot1q tag encapsulation on the 7210 SASK, Release 7.0 R4 or later. You can configure hexadecimal or
decimal values.

SAM Egress SAP mirroring The 5620 SAM supports the mirroring of ingress and egress traffic on source ports and source Procedures 917
54897 support for 7210 SASK interfaces for mirror source sites on the 7210 SASK, Release 7.0 R4 or later. and 918

SAM CFM fault propagation The 5620 SAM supports CFM fault propagation for MEPs configured on the 7210 SASK, Procedure 892
64362 Release 7.0 R6 or later. Fault
Propagation
parameter in the
5620 SAM
Parameter
Search Tool


SAM Fault propagation LLF The 5620 SAM supports operational groups for fault propagation for VLANs on the 7210 SASM Procedures 146
40273 with dot1q/QinQ SAPs (in accessuplink mode), Release 7.0 R1 or later. Ports with null, dot1q, and QinQ encapsulation and 171
on access ports can be associated with operational groups.

SAM IPv6 support on 7210 The 5620 SAM supports IPv6 for L3 interfaces on IES and VPRN services for the 7210 SASM Procedures 76
42065 SAS (in network mode), Release 7.0 R4 or later. 25 and 7769

42067 criteria for SAP ingress SAP access ingress policy for the 7210 SASM, Release 7.0 R1 or later.
QoS classification

SAM LDP Local LSR ID The 5620 SAM supports interface addresses for the local LSR ID on LDP interfaces and Procedures 29
42073 support targeted peers for the 7210 SASM (in network mode), Release 7.0 R4 or later. 14 and 2915

42075 classification using IP access ingress policies for the 7210 SASM, Release 7.0 R1 or later.
precedence

42087 dot1q tag encapsulation on the 7210 SASM, Release 7.0 R4 or later. You can configure hexadecimal or
decimal values.

SAM 6VPE and 6PE The 5620 SAM supports 6PE and 6VPE using BGP peer configuration on the 7210 SASM (in Procedure 295
42091 network mode), Release 7.0 R4 or later.

SAM LDP DoD The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of LDP DoD for LDP peers on the 7210 SASM (in Procedure 2916

SAM Dynamic MSPW using The 5620 SAM supports TPE dynamic MSPW service management on the 7210 SASM (in Section 79.1
42099 BGP functionality network mode), Release 7.0 R4 or later. Procedure 793

49047 Enhancement DWDM shelves are supported on the 7210 SASM, Release 7.0 R4 or later. Active DWDM
shelves and alarms are supported on the 7210 SASM, Release 7.0 R5 or later.

SAM Multihop BFD The 5620 SAM supports multihop BFD for BGP peers and TLDP peers on the 7210 SASM (in Procedures 295
49667 network mode), Release 7.0 R1 or later. and 2916

SAM New MIB support for The 5620 SAM supports IGMP snooping synchronization for MC peer groups on the 7210 SAS Procedure 421
54893 7210 SAS nodes M, Release 7.0 R1 or later.

The 5620 SAM supports resource allocation for the maximum number of IP subnets in the Procedure 1433
system resource profile for the 7210 SASM (in network mode), Release 7.0 R4 or later.

SAM MIP Creation using The 5620 SAM supports MIP creation for VPLS SAPs and SDPs on the 7210 SASM, Release Procedures 75


SAM Support for BITS The 5620 SAM supports BITSrelated alarms on the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R1 or later. —
40033

SAM IPv6 support on 7210 The 5620 SAM supports IPv6 for routing instances, numbered network interfaces, and routing —
42065 SAS policies, on the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R2 or later.

The 5620 SAM supports OSPFv3 for network interfaces on the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R2 or —
later.

The 5620 SAM supports IPv6 for inband management of the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R4 or —
later.

The 5620 SAM supports IPv6 for L3 interfaces on IES and VPRN services for the 7210 SASR, Procedures 76
Release 7.0 R4 or later. 25 and 7769

42067 criteria for SAP ingress SAP access ingress policy for the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R1 or later.
QoS classification

42073 support targeted peers for the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R4 or later. 14 and 2915

42075 classification using IP access ingress policies for the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R1 or later.
precedence

SAM Primary VLAN support The 5620 SAM supports Primary VLAN for Ethernet CFM on the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R4 Section 89.1
42077 or later. Procedure 892

SAM ECMP for LDP only The 5620 SAM supports ECMP for LDP on the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R4 or later. Support is Procedures 14
42085 LSR LSPs for LSR LSPs only. ECMP for LDP is enabled using the system resource profile. 33 and 2917

42087 dot1q tag encapsulation on the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R4 or later. You can configure hexadecimal or
decimal values.

SAM 6VPE and 6PE The 5620 SAM supports 6PE and 6VPE using BGP peer configuration on the 7210 SASR, Procedure 295
42091 Release 7.0 R4 or later.

SAM LDP DoD The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of LDP DoD for LDP peers on the 7210 SASR, Procedure 2916

SAM Dynamic MSPW using The 5620 SAM supports SPE and TPE dynamic MSPW service management on the 7210 Section 79.1
42099 BGP functionality SASR, Release 7.0 R4 or later. Procedure 793

SAM Y.1564 testhead with The 5620 SAM supports Y.1564 bidirectional tests on the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R6 or later. Section 87.6
48464 port loopback and MAC
swap on the 7210 SAS
R6

SAM IPv6 on network The 5620 SAM supports IPv6 for ISIS routing interfaces on the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R2 or Section 29.21
49565 interfaces (ISIS) later.

SAM PTP enhancements for The 5620 SAM supports PTP (IEEE 1588v2) as a timing reference for the 7210 SASR, Release Procedure 168
49665 7210 SAS 7.0 R4 or later.

SAM Multihop BFD The 5620 SAM supports multihop BFD for BGP peers and TLDP peers on the 7210 SASR, Procedures 295
49667 Release 7.0 R4 or later. and 2916

SAM Secondgeneration IMM The 5620 SAM supports the management of secondgeneration IMM cards (1610/100/1000 Tx) Procedure 164
54891 Support for 7210 SASR on the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R6 or later.

54893 7210 SAS nodes R, Release 7.0 R1 or later.

system resource profile for the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R4 or later.

SAM Egress Stats support for The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of egress statistics counters on RVPLS L2 access Procedure 7528
54895 7210 SASR RVPLS interfaces on the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R4 or later.

SAM System resources for The 5620 SAM supports system resource allocation for Up MEPs in VPLS on the 7210 SASR, Procedure 1433
54899 VPLS Up MEPs on 7210 Release 7.0 R4 or later. Support is for IMMv2 cards only.
SASR

SAM Bidirectional MIPS for The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of bidirectional MIPs on Epipe SAPs and SDPs for Procedures 748
60658 Epipe services on the the 7210 SASR, Release 7.0 R4 or later. and 7429
7210 SASR

SAM MIP Creation using The 5620 SAM supports MIP creation for VPLS SAPs and SDPs on the 7210 SASR, Release Procedures 75

SAM CWDM on 7210 SASR6 The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of VWM shelves for CWDM on the 7210 SASR, Procedure 162


SAM MPLSTP on the 7210 The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of MPLSTP (IPv4) for routing instances on the 7210 Chapter 33
40027 SAST SAST (in network mode), Release 7.0 R1 or later.

SAM Support for BITS The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of BITS1 and BITS2 as timing synchronization Procedure 168
40033 references for the 7210 SAST, Release 7.0 R4 or later. BITSrelated alarms are supported.

SAM Fault propagation LLF The 5620 SAM supports operational groups for fault propagation for VLANs on the 7210 SAST Procedures 146
40273 with dot1q/QinQ SAPs (in accessuplink mode), Release 7.0 R1 or later. Ports with null, dot1q, and QinQ encapsulation and 171
on access ports can be associated with operational groups.

42067 criteria for SAP ingress SAP access ingress policy for the 7210 SAST, Release 7.0 R1 or later.
QoS classification

42073 support targeted peers for the 7210 SAST (in network mode), Release 7.0 R4 or later. 14 and 2915

42075 classification using IP access ingress policies for the 7210 SAST, Release 7.0 R1 or later.
precedence

SAM Primary VLAN support The 5620 SAM supports Primary VLAN for Ethernet CFM on the 7210 SAST (in network mode), Section 89.1
42077 Release 7.0 R4 or later. Procedure 892

SAM ECMP for LDP only The 5620 SAM supports ECMP for LDP on the 7210 SAST, Release 7.0 R4 or later. Support is Procedures 14
42085 LSR LSPs for LSR LSPs only. ECMP for LDP is enabled using the system resource profile. 33 and 2917

42087 dot1q tag encapsulation on the 7210 SAST, Release 7.0 R4 or later. You can configure hexadecimal or
decimal values.

SAM LDP DoD The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of LDP DoD for LDP peers on the 7210 SAST (in Procedure 2916

SAM Dynamic MSPW using The 5620 SAM supports TPE dynamic MSPW service management on the 7210 SAST (in Section 79.1
42099 BGP functionality network mode), Release 7.0 R4 or later. Procedure 793

SAM MCLAG without LACP The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of MC LAGs without LACP signaling on the 7210 Procedures 15
48815 SAST, Release 7.0 R4 or later. 12, 1513, 451,
and 452

SAM Mixedmode LSP on the The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of mixedmode LSPs for IP/MPLS service tunnels Procedure 351
48817 7210 SAST connected to the 7210 SAST (in network mode), Release 7.0 R1 or later.

SAM OSPFv2 as PECE The 5620 SAM supports OSPFv2 configuration for VPRN routing instances on the 7210 SAST Procedure 7719
48819 protocol (in network mode), Release 7.0 R1 or later.

49047 Enhancement DWDM shelves are supported on the 7210 SAST, Release 7.0 R4 or later. Active DWDM
shelves and alarms are supported on the 7210 SAST, Release 7.0 R5 or later.

SAM PTP enhancements for The 5620 SAM supports configuration of the frequency source for a PTP clock on the 7210 Procedure 1618
49665 7210 SAS SAST, Release 7.0 R4 or later.

SAM Multihop BFD The 5620 SAM supports multihop BFD for BGP peers and TLDP peers on the 7210 SAST (in Procedures 295
49667 network mode), Release 7.0 R4 or later. and 2916

SAM New MIB support for The 5620 SAM supports enabling AIS frame generation on Epipe MEPs on the 7210 SAST (in Procedure 892
54893 7210 SAS nodes accessuplink mode), Release 6.0 R1 or later.

The 5620 SAM supports IGMP snooping synchronization for MC peer groups on the 7210 SAS Procedure 421
T, Release 7.0 R1 or later.

system resource profile for the 7210 SAST (in network mode), Release 7.0 R4 or later.

SAM MIP Creation using The 5620 SAM supports MIP creation for VPLS SAPs and SDPs on the 7210 SAST, Release Procedures 75


SAM IPv6 support on 7210 The 5620 SAM supports IPv6 for L3 interfaces on IES and VPRN services for the 7210 SASX, Procedures 76
42065 SAS Release 7.0 R4 or later. 25 and 7769

42067 criteria for SAP ingress SAP access ingress policy for the 7210 SASX, Release 7.0 R1 or later.
QoS classification

42073 support targeted peers for the 7210 SASX, Release 7.0 R4 or later. 14 and 2915

42075 classification using IP access ingress policies for the 7210 SASX, Release 7.0 R1 or later.
precedence

SAM Primary VLAN support The 5620 SAM supports Primary VLAN for Ethernet CFM on the 7210 SASX, Release 7.0 R4 Section 89.1
42077 or later. Procedure 892

42087 dot1q tag encapsulation on the 7210 SASX, Release 7.0 R4 or later. You can configure hexadecimal or
decimal values.

SAM 6VPE and 6PE The 5620 SAM supports 6PE and 6VPE using BGP peer configuration on the 7210 SASX, Procedure 295

SAM LDP DoD The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of LDP DoD for LDP peers on the 7210 SASX, Procedure 2916

SAM Dynamic MSPW using The 5620 SAM supports SPE and TPE dynamic MSPW service management on the 7210 Section 79.1
42099 BGP functionality SASX, Release 7.0 R4 or later. Procedure 793

49047 Enhancement DWDM shelves are supported on the 7210 SASX, Release 7.0 R4 or later. Active DWDM
shelves and alarms are supported on the 7210 SASX, Release 7.0 R5 or later.

SAM Multihop BFD The 5620 SAM supports multihop BFD for BGP peers and TLDP peers on the 7210 SASX, Procedures 295
49667 Release 7.0 R4 or later. and 2916

54893 7210 SAS nodes X, Release 7.0 R1 or later.

system resource profile for the 7210 SASX, Release 7.0 R4 or later.

SAM L3 Hierarchical ingress The 5620 SAM supports hierarchical ingress QoS for L3 interfaces on the 7210 SASX, Release Section 68.9
54905 QoS support for 7210 5.0 R4 or later. Aggregate rate limits are configurable for ingress queues in IES and VPRN Procedures 76
SASX services in addition to VLL and VPLS. 30 and 7776

SAM MIP Creation using The 5620 SAM supports MIP creation for VPLS SAPs and SDPs on the 7210 SASX, Release Procedures 75


SAM BGP PrefixIndependent The 5620 SAM supports the enabling of the Backup Path parameter on a router BGP site and Procedures 293
28542 Convergence VPRN BGP site level on the 7705 SAR, Release 7.0 R1 or later. and 7712

SAM MPTHLv2 support The 5620 SAM supports the MPTHLC with 1+0 protection and 1+1 HSB protection, on the 7705 Section 9.8
44258 SAR, Release 6.2 R2 or later.

SAM MPTHQAM support The 5620 SAM supports the MPTHQAM with 1+0 protection and 1+1 HSB protection, on the Section 9.8
44260 7705 SAR, Release 6.2 R2 or later.

SAM MLPPP bundle for The 5620 SAM supports the endpoint type bundle as a physical link, on the 7705 SAR. The Section 6.2
48898 equipment link on physical link appears when the bundle is up, and the physical link is down when the bundle is
topology map down. In the physical topology map, the physical link is green when the link is up and red when
the link is down. This feature is applicable for IMA and PPP bundles.

SAM Firewall support The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of FTP ALG and application assurance on a security Procedure 671
49449 profile policy, on a 7705 SAR8 (with CSMv2), 7705 SAR18 (with Winpath 3 cards), 7705 SAR
H, 7705 SARHc, and 7705 SARWx, Release 7.0 or later.

SAM OAM extensions for BGP The 5620 SAM supports LSP ping and LSP trace OAM diagnostic tests with the Target Type Procedures 88
49453 LSP ping and trace configured as BGP LSP on the 7705 SAR, Release 7.0 R1 or later. 31, 8832

SAM Unnumbered support for You can assign an unnumbered network interface to an LDP, ISIS, and MPLS (RSVP) interface Procedures 28
49455 ISIS, LDP, and RSVP on a 7705 SAR, Release 7.0 R1 or later. 10, 2811, 2914,
TE 2927, and 323.

SAM 7705 SARA MLPPP The 7705 SARA T1/E1 supports IPCP encapsulation on card 2 ports, on the i8 × channelized Procedures 16
49461 support DS1/E1 ASAP, Release 7.0 R1 or later. IPCP ports can be bound to MLPPP bundles. MLPPP 48, 1732, 403,
bundles can be added as an interface to a VPRN or IES service, and IPCP ports can be added 7625, and 7769
as an interface to a VPRN or IES service.

SAM Asymmetric control for The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of asymmetric control on a Cpipe L2 access interface Procedure 7434
49473 Cpipes with CEM encapsulation, on the 7705 SAR, Release 7.0 R1 or later.

SAM Differential clock support The Clock Source parameter value Differential is supported on a 4 × channelized OC3/OC12 Procedure 1732
52871 on a DS1/E1 channel on ASAP SFP MDA for a DS1/E1 channel, on a 7705 SAR8, 7705 SAR8 v2, or 7705 SAR18,
a 4 × channelized Release 6.2 R1 or later.
OC3/OC12 ASAP SFP
MDA

SAM Differential clock support The Clock Source parameter value Differential is supported on a 4 × channelized DS3/E3 ASAP Procedure 1735
54679 on a DS3/E3 channel on MDA for a DS3/E3 channel, on a 7705 SAR8, 7705 SAR8 v2, or 7705 SAR18, Release 7.0
a 4 × channelized R1 or later.
DS3/E3 ASAP MDA

SAM 7705 SR0S 12.0 Merge These features introduce support for a number of RFEs for the 7705 SAR. 5620 SAM
55028 RFEs Release
SAM
Description
58488

SAM 7705 SARX support The 5620 SAM supports the 7705 SARX. The 7705 SARX is a fixed variant with three Section 9.8
55241 integrated MDAs.

SAM 7705 SARH Ethernet The 7705 SARH supports the 4 × 10/100 Ethernet module. Section 9.8
55243 module support Procedure 1643

SAM 7705 SARM Ethernet The 5620 SAM supports the 6 port Ethernet module for the 7705 SARM, Release 7.0 R1 or Section 9.8
55245 module support later. The following interfaces are supported: Procedure 1643
2 × 100/1000 Mbps ports
2 × 100/1000 Mbps combo ports (2×SFP or 2×Cu RJ.5)
2 × 1000 Mbps (PoE/PoE+) ports

SAM MDA mode support The 5620 SAM supports MDA mode configuration on the 4 × Channelized OC3/OC12 ASAP Procedure 1640
57714 SFP, on a 7705 SAR8 or 7705 SAR18, Release 7.0 R1 or later. The following MDA modes are
configurable:
p4oc3, 4 OC3 ports (14)
p1oc12, 1 OC12 port

SAM Security queue policy The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of a security queue policy on a 7705 SAR8, 7705 Procedures 16
57952 support SAR8 (with CSMv2), 7705 SAR18, 7705 SARH, and 7705 SARX, Release 7.0 or later. The 40 and 4928
security queue policy can be bound to a daughter card for network ingress and access ingress
properties.

SAM RFE 196060: ACLs and The NE Filter Name parameter is configurable for ACL MAC, ACL IP, and ACL VLAN filter Procedures 501,
58035 VLAN filters display NE policies. The NE Filter Name parameter is displayed when an ACL filter is assigned, for 502, 509, and
filter names and support example, to L2 and L3 interfaces and SDP tunnels. This feature is supported on the 7705 SAR, 7528.
autocomplete Release 7.0 or later.

SAM Interface change support When the 5620 SAM activates an NE software image, the system is updated with the new boot Procedure 2710
64530 for boot loader loader file. If the boot loader update fails, the BOF is replaced with the original one. This
functionality is supported on the 7705 SARA, 7705 SART1/E1, 7705 SARF, 7705 SARHc,
7705 SARW, 7705 SARWx, and 7705 SARX, Release 6.2 or later.

Policy enhancements

42067 SAP access ingress policy for 7210 SAS devices.
42067 criteria for SAP ingress SAP access ingress policy for 7210 SAS devices.
QoS classification

SAM SAP ingress QoS The 5620 SAM supports IP Precedence classification for IP and IPv6 match criteria in 7210 and Procedure 492
42075 classification using IP 1830 SAP access ingress policies.
precedence

SAM Enhancement to The 7210 Remarking Policy form contains tabs that list the policies that the remarking policy is Procedure 4932
54901 remarking policy support assigned to.

SAM Policy enhancements for The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of remarking using DEI bits, with or without dot1p Procedures 494,
54903 7210 SAS values, in the following QoS policies: 498, and 4932
7210 and 1830 Port Access Egress policy
7210 and 1830 Network policy (port type)
7210 and 1830 Remarking policy (DOT1P and DOT1PDSCP type)


SAM Network Group Network Group Encryption, or NGE, is an AlcatelLucent 7705 SAR mechanism for encrypting Chapter 80
45150 Encryption MPLSbased service traffic. The encryption is performed at the service level, and obviates the
need to manage IPsec tunnel meshes at the network level.
You can use NGE to secure the following objects in an IP/MPLS network:
SDPs, to provide tunnel encryption for services such as VLL, VPLS, and VPRN
MPBGP based VPRN services
The 7705 SAR NGE implementation is closely integrated with, and dependent on, the 5620
SAM, which manages the encryption key distribution and synchronization throughout the
managed network. For increased security, you can configure the 5620 SAM to replace the
encryption keys according to a schedule.

SAM RFE 194468: Epipe The 5620 SAM supports the use SDP tunnels with BGP tunnel enabled for Epipe spoke SDP —
55316 spoke SDP termination termination on IES and VPRN interfaces.
on IES/VPRN with SDP
with BGP tunnel


SAM Y.1564 bandwidth The 5620 SAM supports Y.1564 bandwidth availability tests for Ethernet services on the 7210 Section 87.6
54909 availability test SASD, 7210 SASK, 7210 SASM, 7210 SASR, 7210 SAST, and 7210 SASX, Release 6.0
R3 or later.

Feature Feature or Description See
ID function


SAM IPDR A 5620 SAM system can include a Cflowd auxiliary server, which is a scalable component that 5620 SAM Planning
54514 support for collects AA Cflowd statistics data from NEs. A Cflowd auxiliary server forwards the statistics data in Guide, for scaling and
AA Cflowd IPDR format to an OSS or thirdparty processing system for purposes such as traffic analysis and deployment guidelines
statistics data analytics. 5620 SAM | 5650 CPAM
Cflowd auxiliary server deployment is supported on a RHEL platform. Installation and Upgrade
Guide, for deployment
information
5620 SAM Statistics
Management Guide, for
configuration information

Feature Feature or function Description See
ID

GUI enhancements

SAM Scalability: Java The 5620 SAM supports up to 2000 NEs per equipment group. Up to 500 NEs can be “To configure
52376 GUI displayed at one time in the navigation tree and on the topology map. Administrators can 5620 SAM system
configure a system preference for the number of NEs to display when an equipment group is preferences” in the
expanded on the tree. Users can temporarily display additional selected NEs in the navigation 5620 SAM System
tree, up to 500. Administrator Guide
For equipment groups in the 5620 SAM, users can open a list form of the NEs in the group Procedures 53 and 6
using the contextual menu for the group object in the navigation tree and topology map. 32

5620 SAM system management enhancements

SAM IPv6 support for 5620 SAM system deployment is supported in a pure IPv6 environment. During a system “IPv4 and IPv6” in the
15287 intercomponent installation, you can specify IPv6 addresses for communication between 5620 SAM 5620 SAM | 5650
communication components. You can also convert a system to IPV6 after an upgrade to Release 13.0. CPAM Installation and
The following support IPv6 addressing: Upgrade Guide
5620 SAM main servers, databases, auxiliary servers, and GUI clients “5620 SAM conversion
5620 SAM applications to IPv6” in the 5620
TACACS+, RADIUS, and LDAP remote authentication SAM | 5650 CPAM
5620 SAMO XML/JMS interface Installation and
Upgrade Guide
5620 SAM Planning
Guide, for restrictions

SAM LDAP In addition to RADIUS and TACACS+, you can configure LDAP or LDAPS servers for remote “Remote 5620 SAM
40687 authentication and user authentication, and can map LDAP attributes to 5620 SAM user groups. user access” section in
authorization for the 5620 SAM System
remote users Administrator Guide

SAM Revocation check The 5620 SAM supports configuring which revocation check method a system uses to verify “NE user and device
46124 method for certificates sent from a CA. security” in the 5620
certificate authority SAM System
profiles Administrator Guide

SAM Persistent CGAs for The 5620 SAM supports specifying a CGA for SeND that persists through switchovers and Procedure 2811
46126 SeND reboots. Persistent CGAs can be configured on network interfaces, and IP address and access “To configure and
interfaces in IES and VPRN services. manage PKI site
The 5620 SAM also supports importing and exporting SeND RSA keypairs on a site. security on an NE” in
the 5620 SAM System
Administrator Guide

SAM Automatic schedule The 5620 SAM automatically adjusts the schedule associated with a scheduled task to —
50684 adjustment for account for a system change to or from daylight saving time. Each scheduled task run is
daylight saving time adjusted as required, according to the 5620 SAM system time setting.

SAM NE backup and If the NE backup file information in the 5620 SAM database does not match the actual NE —
50903 database backup file information, for example, after a database restore, or the addition of a file by an
information agent other than the 5620 SAM, the 5620 SAM automatically synchronizes the information.
synchronization

SAM Enhanced auxiliary The 5620 SAM collects a comprehensive array of server performance statistics for an auxiliary “5620 SAM database
50972 database monitoring database cluster, and raises alarms for member unavailability. management” chapter
of the 5620 SAM
System Administrator
Guide

SAM Horizontal scale To increase the scale of statistics collection, the number of auxiliary databases in an 5620 5620 SAM Planning
52298 improvements SAM auxiliary database cluster increases to a minimum of five. Guide, for scaling and
deployment guidelines


SAM Multiinstance ISIS The 5620 SAM supports a single instance of ISIS for a base routing instance on the 7210 Procedure 2923
42071 (7210 SASM SASM (in network mode), Release 7.0 R4 or later. The ISIS instance can have an ID value of
single instance) 0 to 31.


SAM Multiinstance ISIS The 5620 SAM supports up to 32 instances of ISIS for a base routing instance on the 7210 Procedure 2923
42069 (7210 SAS X, R, T SASR, Release 7.0 R4 or later.
multiple instances)


42069 (7210 SAS X, R, T SAST (in network mode), Release 7.0 R4 or later.
multiple instances)


42069 (7210 SAS X, R, T SASX, Release 7.0 R4 or later.
multiple instances)

7450 ESS and 7750 SR enhancements

SAM 1588 IEEE PTP The 5620 SAM supports configuring PTP ports on Ethernet ports, provided the port supports Procedure 1618
28119 over Ethernet PTP hardware assistance.

SAM Automatic SFM The 5620 SAM automatically provisions integrated SFMs in CPM5 cards with builtin modules Sections 9.7, 9.11, and
38972 provisioning on 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, and 7950 XRS nodes that support CPM5. 9.13

SAM Independent MUX The 5620 SAM supports configuring a LAG to use independent MUX machine control. Procedures 1512 and
47561 control 1513

SAM G.703 T12 signal The 5620 SAM supports configuring BITS input and output ports to use the G.703 T12 (2048 Procedure 168
47614 support kHz) signal format.

SAM Port ifDesc and The 5620 SAM supports configuring LLDP on a port to send the ifDesc value in place of the Procedure 171
47628 IPv6 management ifAlias value over port TLV. Additionally, IPv6 addresses can be configured on the Transmit
address forwarding MGMT Address tab.

SAM Disabling BFD timer The 5620 SAM supports configuring a LAG to continue running BFD timers when a link failure Procedures 1512 and
47834 reset on perlink that is caused by a soft reset occurs. 1513
BFD during ISSU

SAM CFLOWD manual The 5620 SAM supports configuring CFLOWD flow exports to occur when triggered manually. Procedure 147
49618 export support

SAM Reset SONET port The 5620 SAM supports configuring SONET ports on M4 OC48 SFP B modules to reset the Procedure 1710
51183 on path down port when the path transitions to operationally down while administratively up.


SAM TU12 AIS fault The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of TU12 AIS fault propagation on a 2 × Channelized Procedure 1640
49481 propagation into PW OC3/STM1 ASAP SFP and 4 × Channelized OC3/OC12 ASAP SFP, on the 7705 SAR8, 7705
status SAR8v2, and 7705 SAR18, Release 6.2 R1 or later.

SAM 12port SDIv2 card The 5620 SAM supports the 12port SDIv2 card on the 7705 SAR8, 7705 SAR8v2, and 7705 Section 9.8
50198 support SAR18, Release 6.2 R1 or later.

SAM AMI encoding The 5620 SAM supports the configuration of AMI encoding for T1 interfaces on the ASAPv1, Procedure 1731
53759 support for T1 ASAPv2 on the 7705 SARA, 7705 SARF, 7705 SARH, 7705 SARM, 7705 SAR8, and 7705
RFE interfaces SAR18, Release 6.2 R1 or later.
193777

SAM Option to disable The 5620 SAM supports the option to disable the power feed on a 7705 SAR, Release 6.2 R1 Procedure 1624
54370 power feed or later.
DTS

188053

OmniSwitch enhancements

SAM AOS hybrid ports OmniSwitch NEs using AOS Release 6.4.6 or later, or AOS Release 6.6.5 or later, support Chapter 9
49322 hybrid mode.


SAM PPP Session Residential Subscriber Profile and SLA Profile Alias configuration on active LNS subscriber Procedure 7230
12557 Support on LNS hosts.
mid session
changes

SAM Multiple /128 SHCV Neighbor discovery configuration on IES and VPRN soft GRE group interfaces. “To configure
39671 addresses per ESM system preference option: Retrieve SLAAC Host Addresses. 5620 SAM system
SLAAC host preferences” in the
5620 SAM System
Administrator Guide
Procedures 7617 and
7722

SAM DHCP relay on DHCP Relay and Python policy configuration on network interface on base routing instance. Procedures 2810, 28
47731 network ports Python policy configuration on L3 access interface on IES and VPRN routing instance. 11, 7649, and 7794

SAM IPoE session IPoE session support, configured through new IPoE session policy, which is bound to the "IPoE sessions"
47751 following objects: "IPoE session policies"
VPLS capture SAP (Procedure 7222) "Workflow to configure
IES group interface (Procedure 7617) IPoE sessions"
VPRN group interface (Procedure 7722)
Clear IPoE Sessions function for IES and VPRN SAPs and MSAPs (Procedure 7231).

SAM Gx: redundant BNG Diameter peer policy has Proxy option in Connection Origin configuration, allowing proxy site "Diameter peer
47759 configuration with peer synchronization tag on local definitions of diameter peer policy. policies"
Diameter Proxy peer group synchronization option on MC peer group (Procedure 421). Procedures 5610 and
5611

SAM IPv6 support for IPoE linking configuration on IES and VPRN subscriber interfaces in Retail mode. Procedures 7614 and
47763 IPOE/PPPOE 7731
Wholesale/Retail

SAM DHCPv4 lease hold Lease Hold Time (Days, Hours, Minutes, Seconds) configuration support on local DHCPv4 Procedure 282
47773 time support server.

SAM NASREQ Support for diameter NASREQ authentication for ESM hosts. "Diameter application
47785 authentication NASREQ application type configuration on diameter application policy (Procedure 6223) and policies"
diameter peer policy (Procedure 5610). "Workflow to configure
Diameter Authentication Policy binding on the following objects: diameter NASREQ"

Local user database IPoE host (Procedure 726)
Local user database PPP host (Procedure 727)
VPLS capture SAP (Procedure 7222)
IES group interface (Procedure 7617)
VPRN group interface (Procedure 7722)

SAM Universal Plug and New UPnP policy object, with configuration on subscriber profile. "UPnP policies"
47795 Play (UPnP) Procedures 6226 and
622

SAM VLAN to anchor L2 AP configuration added to WLAN GW configuration on IES and VPRN group interfaces. VLAN access to
47801 ISA Allows VLAN (L2) access via internal epipe to soft GRE tunnel ISA, preserving functionality anchor ISA
that requires a soft GRE tunnel. "Workflow to configure
An epipe SAP template policy allows the user to specify ingress and egress qos policies and VLAN to anchor ISA
traffic filtering policies for access SAPs. functionality"
Chapter 82
Procedures 7620, 77
48, and 821

SAM L2 wholesale Support for L2 wholesaleretail network configurations. "L2 wholesale"
47811 New VPLS SAP template policy object (Procedure 822). "Workflow to configure
L2 wholesale"
VPLS SAP template policy configuration on VPLS site (procedure 7526).
L2 retail configuration on WLAN GW on IES or VPRN group interface (Procedure 7620 or 77 Chapter 82
48).

SAM PIM on IES group Support for PIM configuration on IES group interface. New PIM policy object. PIM policy "PIM policies", "PIM on
48176 interface assignment on subscriber profile. IES group interfaces"
Procedures 6227 and
7621

SAM IPDR for AA You can configure the 5620 SAM to export AA accounting statistics to files for retrieval by OSS "AA accounting
54518 accounting clients. The file format is one of the following: statistics collection" in
statistics IP Detail Record, or IPDR—the data is encoded in standard eXternal Data Representation, or chapter 85
XDR, format

5670 RAM—the data is encoded for internal use by the Release 7.0 R3 or later 5670 RAM to
generate reports

Protocol enhancements

SAM LMP support The 5620 SAM supports the enabling of LMP on a base routing instance and the following LMP Section 29.1
47988 configurations: Procedures 2919, 29
LMP site 20, and 2921
LMP peer
control channel under an LMP peer
TE links under an LMP site
data bearers under a TE link

GMPLSUNI The 5620 SAM supports the enabling of GMPLS on a base routing instance, and the following Chapter 34 Procedure
support GMPLSUNI configurations: 2919
GMPLS loopback interface Procedure 2810
GMPLS instance
GMPLS peer
GMPLS path
GMPLSUNI LSP
GMPLSUNI tunnel group endpoint
OAM, BFD, ICMP, and mirroring are supported on network ports bound to a GMPLS LSP.

SAM ISIS ATT bit The 5620 SAM supports configuring base and VPRN routers to suppress setting the ATT bit on Section 29.7
48006 suppression support LSPs in an ISIS instance.

SAM BGP address family The 5620 SAM supports configuring a prefix limit for each address family on BGP groups and Procedures 294 and
48046 prefix limits BGP peers. 295

Policy enhancements

SAM Python protect file NE configuration to store Python script file at protected location, using HMACSHA256 Section 57.1
35636 action encryption algorithm and shared key with Python script policy. Procedures 1419 and
571

SAM Import/Export 5620 You can now export existing global policies to a file in order to make them available for import Procedures 4812 and
45146 SAM Policy elsewhere, for example, on another 5620 SAM server. This ability applies to SAP access 4813
ingress, SAP access egress, ACL filter, and most routing policy types. Policy procedures
throughout the 5620
SAM User Guide

SAM Allow policy name The 5620 SAM policy framework now allows a colon to be used in the policy name. Policy procedures
45916 in 5620 SAM with throughout the 5620
colon SAM User Guide

SAM Challenge response The 5620 SAM now supports AccessChallenge messaging for RADIUS authentication. 5620 SAM System
47569 in RADIUS Administrator Guide

SAM SLA profile host Enhanced host count configuration on SLA profile. Set host limits for IPv4, IPv6, and L2TP Procedure 623
47769 limit per host type host types, plus various subcategories for each.

SAM Redirect Policy A new Redirect policy is now available that allows specifying multiple redirect target Section 50.1
47847 enhancement IPv6 destinations. It also lets users define health check test methods used to validate the ability for Procedures 502, 503,
redirect policy a given destination to receive redirected traffic. This component covers SNMP tests. and 508
support

SAM Enhanced VRF A new Redirect policy is now available that allows specifying multiple redirect target Section 50.1
47849 support in redirect destinations. It also lets users define health check test methods used to validate the ability for Procedures 502, 503,
policy: ping test, a given destination to receive redirected traffic. This component covers Ping and URL tests. and 508
unicast test,
forward nexthop
router

SAM Redirect Policy A new Redirect policy is now available that allows specifying multiple redirect target Section 50.1
47851 enhancement destinations. It also lets users define health check test methods used to validate the ability for Procedures 502, 503,
unicast route a given destination to receive redirected traffic. This component covers the unicast route and 508
reachability test reachability test.

SAM Ingress filter Enhanced host count configuration on SLA profile. Set host limits for IPv4, IPv6, and L2TP Procedure 7737
47865 policies on VPRN host types, plus various subcategories for each.
network interfaces
no support for label
mode prefix

SAM System blacklist A new System Filter policy is now available that allows operators to configure a filter chain for Section 50.1
47869 filter (IP/IPv6) packet matching. In this chain, the active system filter policy rules are evaluated first. If no Procedures 502, 503,
match occurs, only then are the rules of any chained filter policies evaluated. and 5010

SAM Packetlength Packetlength in line cards for ACL IPv6 filter policies is enhanced by adding support for the Procedure 503
47876 conditional action in packetlength condition with a Drop action. The "Packet Length Option" parameter is added to
filter policy an IPv6 filter entry.
enhancements –
IPv6

SAM Ingress QoS The 5620 SAM now supports ingress QoS control of unicast traffic between VPRN sites over Procedure 7738
47882 policies on VPRN automatically or manually created bindings in the VPRN.
network interfaces

SAM Policer The 5620 SAM now supports bypass policers in SAP egress QoS policies for IPv4 and IPv6 Procedure 493
47884 enhancements criteria statements.

SAM QoS: scheduler The 5620 SAM extends support of existing overrides to the parent scheduler weights for Procedure 4947
47886 weight overrides scheduler policies applied to L2 and L3 access interfaces.

SAM Add packetbyte The 5620 SAM adds the ability to configure a packet byte offset for packets forwarded through Procedures 491 and
47890 offset for ingress an ingress subscriber, SAP, or queuegroup queue. In addition, subscriber, SAP, and queue 4924
accounting (queues) group queue overrides are supported.

SAM Prefix lists for QOS The 5620 SAM adds support for prefix match lists to both SAP ingress and SAP egress QoS Procedures 491, 493,
47898 policies ipcriteria policies, to be used in conjunction with IP criteria match statements. and 496
(only) applied to
SAPs

SAM Increased Maximum The maximum configurable values for queue PIR, CIR, MBS and CBS has been increased Parameter Search Tool
47902 Queue MBS/CBS within: for applicability
and Rates SAP ingress/egress QoS policies
Network queue policies
Ingress/egress queue group templates
Egress WRED queues

SAM QoS classification Fragments of an IPv6 packet can now be classified at a SAP ingress in order to provide Procedure 491
47904 of IPv6 fragments differentiated QoS control for fragments, compared to entire IPv6 packets. For fragmented IPv6
packets, the ability to identify the first fragment and nonfirst fragments of a packet is provided.
The Fragment parameter is introduced to enable this functionality.

SAM Routing Policy Routing policy variable functionality is extended to allow midstring variables to be expanded. Procedure 531
47910 Parameterization: Midstring expansions such as "peer@asname@" or "comm@peeras@highpref" are now
midstring variable permitted. This provides a more powerful and reusable approach to the policy structure.
expansion

SAM BGP Flowspec The BGP Extended Community has been enhanced by introducing a generic extended Procedure 534
48004 enhancement: hex community of format ext:<value1>:<value2> and ext:<regex1>&<regex2>. Use of the <regex>
encoding attributes can provide flexibility for removing multiple extended communities from a BGP route.

SAM BGP ADDPATHS BGP AddPaths is an enhancement that allows a BGP router to advertise multiple distinct Procedure 531
48010 for selected routes paths for the same prefix/NLRI. This allows for routing churn reduction, faster convergence,
(Route Policy for and better loadsharing. The "Add Path Send Limit" parameter is added to the routing policy
addpaths) statement for Action and Default Action.

SAM BGP link bandwidth The 5620 SAM now supports enabling EBGP link bandwidth for IPv4, IPv6, VPNIPv4, and Procedures 534 and
48014 extended VPNIPv6 address families at the BGP group and neighbor levels for base routing and VPRN 7712
community (for services. The new link bandwidth extended community is also supported in both a community
unequal cost Load member and in a community expression.
balancing)

SAM BGP fast reroute The BGP fast reroute feature is extended to enable the functionality for a specific set of IPv4 or Procedure 531
48044 policies to control IPv6 prefixes, using a BGP import policy. A new attribute called "Install Backup Path" is added
which routes are to a routing policy statement in the context of Action and Default Action to facilitate this
protected (prefix enhancement.
list, community)

SAM RFE 170915: The 5620 SAM now allows the ability to configure an empty prefix list so that it may be pre Procedure 533
49685 Support for empty provisioned.
prefixlists

SAM DCR 698263: Policy management is enhanced with a confirmation message that will be displayed when a Procedure 4814
50021 Policy Deletion user attempts a routing policy deletion. The confirmation message states that the policy has
Enhancement been used by a service or a routing protocol. An option to exclude the employed policy from
deletion is provided.

SAM DTS 179637: Port The Port Scheduler and Aggregate Rate Limit ranges are increased to 3,200 Gbps in these Parameter Search Tool
57310 Scheduler and Agg contexts: for applicability
RateLimit rates Port Schedulers
need to increase to Aggregate Rate changes at network and access egress, virtual ports, and aggregation
3200G schedulers
Layer 2 and Layer 3 Access Interfaces
Layer 3 Subscriber SAP
MVPLS Encap Group
VPLS Bsite Encap Group
VPLS Sap template


SAM Service searching Service navigation trees for VPLS, MVPLS, IES, and VPRNs display a maximum of 50 access Procedure 311
8531 and listing interfaces and SAPs at a time.
improvement When this limit is reached, you can click on the parent object under which the SAPs or access
interfaces are listed to open a tab with the full list of objects.

SAM Ignore default uRPF The 5620 SAM supports configuring L3 access interfaces on VPRN, IES, and base routing Procedure 298
28194 routes instances to ignore default routes when performing a uRPF route lookup.

SAM RR Convergence You can include routes from BGP peers for MPVN IPv4 and MVPN IPv6 in RR convergence Procedure 293
41854 Optimizations for by configuring the Ignore Router ID and Ignore Router ID Internal parameters on a BGP site.
MVPN Routes

SAM Enhance composite You can use the 5620 SAM to discover VPRN RT connectivity. When you navigate to a 5620 SAM System
45768 services for RT composite service, you can display RT connectors between all of the VPRN on the flat Administrator Guide
connectivity in topology map. You must configure the composite service system preferences so that new Procedures 836 and
VPRN services VPRN services are checked and included in an existing composite service. 837

"VPRN RT
connections"

SAM Fault propagation The 5620 SAM supports configuring fault propagation between Ethernet SAPs and legacy Chapter 74
47828 for PPP and HLDC Frame Relay, HLDC, and PPP/MLPPP connections on sites in Ipipe services.

SAM SPI hashing for The 5620 SAM supports configuring ESP SPI hashing for IPv6 traffic on VPLS services or L3 Chapters 75, 76, and
47968 encrypted LTE interfaces, and SPI load balancing on VPRN, VPLS, IES, and Epipe sites and interfaces. 77
traffic

SAM Ability to remove or The 5620 SAM blocks the association of LI mediation security to 7750 SR NEs that contain ’ Chapters 91 and 92
47986 disable LI capability NL’ in the software version descriptor.

SAM CFlowd sampling The 5620 SAM supports cflowd sampling for unicast and multicast traffic on a routing network Section 28.1
47998 for multicast traffic interface, IES/VPRN L3 access interface, IES/VPRN tunnel interface, and VPRN network Procedures 2810, 36
interface. 11, 7625, 7769, and
7728

SAM Regular expression The 5620 SAM supports an origin and regular expression on community expressions and Procedure 534
48028 support for siteof community members.
origin communities

SAM ISIS IIDTLV This ISIS interoperability extension enables a nonmultiinstance capable router to establish an Procedure 2927
48040 support to allow adjacency in its standard instance 0 in a nonzero instance. Set the Default Instance parameter
single instance NE to true on a nonzero ISIS instance interface.
to connect to non The Default Instance parameter is supported on base NE ISIS instances and on VPRN ISIS
zero instance instances.

SAM LDPv6 for small You can configure a spoke SDP binding bound to an LDP IPv6 LSP to forward mirrored Chapter 91
48084 cell: Mirror and LI packets from a mirror source to a remote mirror destination.
On the mirror destination NE, an IPv6 address is not supported as a Far End Remote Site ID.
Instead, a spoke SDP using a LDP IPv6 SDP coming from mirror source NE must be
referenced.

SAM LDPv6 for small You can use the 5620 SAM to create LDPenabled SDP tunnels an IPv6 Transport Destination Procedure 351
48086 cell: Services (SDP Address.
tunnel and TLDP PWsignaled spoke SDP bindings with IPv6 TLDP are supported on VPLS, VLL, IES, VPRN
Signaling) and RVPLS.

You cannot assign tunnel administrative groups to an SDP using an LDP IPv6 FEC.
L2 services that use the BGP control plane, such as MSPW, BGPAD VPLS, BGPVPLS, and
BGPVPWS, cannot bind to an IPv6 LDP LSP.

SAM LDP shortcut The 5620 SAM supports enabling LDP shortcuts for IPv6 LDP routes. LDP shortcut is enabled Section 29.5
48094 on routing instances, and TTL propagation parameters are configured on LDP sites.

SAM Segment routing— Segment routing enables ISIS to perform shortest path routing and source routing using Procedures 322, 29
48102 single ISIS segments. A segment can represent a local prefix of an NE, a specific adjacency of the NE, a 24, 2927, 288, 289
instance, LFA, link service context, or a specific explicit path over the network. For each segment, the IGP and 7739
protect Remote LFA advertises a segment identifier, or SID.
When segment routing is used together with the MPLS data plane, the SID is a standard MPLS
label. An NE forwarding a packet using segment routing pushes one or more MPLS labels.
You can use the 5620 SAM to configure segment routing and to assign an SID index or label to
ISIS interfaces.

SAM VPRN autobind Segment routing is a new tunnel type in the 5620 SAM. Procedures 293 and
48106 As a BGP shortcut, you can force packets of BGP prefixes to use a segment routing tunnel on 7739
the BGP site. The existing IGP Shortcut Tunnel is deprecated.

In the context of a BGP site, BGP label routes are able to use the segment routing tunnel to
resolve the next hop. The Label Route Transport Tunnel has been added to the BGP site. The
existing Transport Tunnel Shortcut configuration is deprecated.
The use of segment routing as Autobind is added to VPRN services. You can configure the
Auto Bind Tunnel on VPRN sites. The existing autobind configuration is deprecated.

SAM ISIS segment The 5620 SAM supports creating MPLS service tunnels that use ISIS segment routing by Procedure 351
48108 routing for SDPs enabling the SRISIS parameter. Additional readonly information about SRISIS tunnels is
displayed on the tunnel configuration form.

SAM MPLS static label The 5620 SAM supports the Static Label Range parameter on an MPLS site. The Maximum Procedures 322, 323,
48112 updates Number of Static LSP Labels parameter and Maximum Number of Static SVC Labels 326, 747, 7549, 75
parameter on MPLS sites is deprecated. 50, and 768
This parameter range affects the ingress label of VPLS, IES, VLL spoke and mesh SDP

bindings, static hops and static label maps.

SAM Support of SRLG You can use the 5620 SAM to define a penalty weight value associated with an SRLG group. Procedure 5310
48114 weight for bypass CSPF is enhanced to include the SRLG penalty weight in the computation of a FRR detour or

LSP and secondary bypass for the protection of the primary LSP path at a PLR NE.
LSP path

SAM PW SAP for VLL You can use the 5620 SAM to assign a PW SAP as a terminating port on Epipe L2 access Procedures 351 and
48140 Epipe interfaces. 7420
The BGP tunnel type is supported for SDPs with a PW port binding.

SAM SAP enhancements When you enable the Enable Q in Q Untagged Sap parameter on an NE, the 5620 SAM allows Sections 74.1 and 75.1
48146 on Q in Q ports the creation of the following two SAP types: Procedures 1417, 74
The SAP type *.null functions as a default SAP for singletagged frames in a Q in Q 20, 7528, and 7585
port. This SAP accepts single tags in the range 0 to 4095 as well as untagged traffic.
The SAP type *.* functions as a default SAP for doubletagged frames in a Q in Q port.
This SAP accepts untagged, singletagged, and doubletagged frames with tags in the
range 0 to 4095.
The 5620 SAM allows you to configure SAP types X.0, X.*, *.null, and *.* all on the same Q in
Q port.
This feature is supported on Epipe, VPLS, and IVPLS services.
The Enable Q in Q Untagged Sap parameter is not supported on the 7950 XRS as it is enabled
by default.

SAM Wildcard SPMSI The 5620 SAM supports configuring wildcard SPMSI on PIM routing instances in VPRN Procedure 2946
48160 support services.

SAM IPv6 support for The 5620 SAM supports configuring P2MP mLDP tree joining for IPv6 on PIM interfaces on Procedures 2945 and
48168 P2MP mLDP tree base routers and in VPRN services. 2946
join

SAM L2 multicast You can configure IGMP snooping on sites, SAPs, and spoke and mesh SDP bindings on Procedures 7514, 75
48184 optimization for VXLANenabled VPLS services. 38, and 7555
VXLAN—IGMP
snooping on VXLAN

SAM AA subscriber You can configure a Custom Record AA Subscriber accounting policy to include the ASO Chapter 85
48197 statistics record information.
includes ASOs

SAM IPv4 local address You can use the 5620 SAM to assign a local IP address from a pool in a local DHCPv4 or Procedure 3613
48251 assignment for DHCPv6 defined in the routing instance to an IPsec Gateway of the L3 access interface of an
IKEv2 remote IES or VPRN service.
access tunnel with
sticky lease

SAM IPv6 local address
assignment for
48253
assignment for
48253 IKEv2 remote
access tunnel with
sticky lease

SAM NE resync audit The following dynamic readonly objects are excluded from NE audits: —
49663 improvements LDP session
RSVP session
MPLS In Segment, Out Segment, and Cross Connect
MPLS Actual Hop and Actual Path
ISIS SPF Log

SAM BFD support for The 5620 SAM supports configuring BFD on mesh SDP bindings in VPLS services. Procedure 7559
50147 VPLS mesh SDP

SAM Automatic selection You can use the 5620 SAM to enable the automatic selection of route distinguishers on an NE Procedures 148, 74
50631 of route on the following: 12, 7566, and 7743
distinguishers global NE
VLL Epipe site
VPRN site
VPLS site


SAM OAM context The 5620 SAM now allows users to create, run and display the results of various ETHOAM Procedures 873, 874,
46660 creation for ETH tests from service topology views and service navigation tree views. and 8853
OAM

SAM Enhancements to The 5620 SAM now supports Down MEPs for facility MEPs. Parameter "Enable LMM Stats Procedure 1513
47822 ETHLMM Loss (Up Collection" is added to the Port, LAG and router interfaces to allow the collection of LMM Procedure 171
MEPs) statistics.
Procedure 905

SAM TWAMP Light loss TWAMPLight support is extended to include loss measurement statistics collection. Procedure 907
47826 & IPv6

SAM MIPs on MeshSDP MIPs can now be configured on VPLS Mesh SDP bindings. Procedure 7556
47836

SAM Event based on TWAMPLight support is extended to enable users to define thresholds for both delay and loss Procedures 902, 901,
47838 loss and delay in PM Session tests. 903, 904, 905, 907,
(OAM portion as and 909.
input to EEM)

SAM ETHCFM UP MEP The Up MEP in a VPLS configured over a nonoperational LAG is now able to send and receive Parameter Search Tool
47842 Reception LAG ETHCFM traffic. Parameter “Process CPM Traffic on LAG SAP Down” is added to enable for applicability.
Oper Down in VPLS configuration.

SAM 802.32012 Section The 5620 SAM now allows Ethernet link monitoring to be configured on a physical port basis. Procedure 8852
47844 5 Clause 57 – Link Link monitoring works between directlyconnected Ethernet ports and monitors link level errors
Monitoring Phase 2 and symbol errors.

SAM LDPv6 for small IPv6 support is added to LSP Ping and LSP Trace tests for both the source and destination Procedures 8831 and
48096 cell: OAM LSP addresses. 8832
tools

5620 SAM documentation enhancements

— GUI overview The GUI overview chapter in the 5620 SAM User Guide is revised to improve organization and Chapter 3
chapter clarify terminology. Information about user preferences, search functions, and 5620 SAM forms
improvements is expanded and clarified.

2. 2 — 5620 SAM system overview
2.1 5620 SAM system overview
2.2 About this guide

2.1 5620 SAM system overview
The AlcatelLucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, or 5620 SAM, enables endtoend network and service management of AlcatelLucent NEs, and limited management of third
party NEs. Thirdparty NEs are referred to as generic NEs, or GNEs. The 5620 SAM enables you to perform tasks that include the following:
Provision a network with fast and easy configuration and multivendor scripting workflows that reduce risk of error and shorten network deployment time.
Accelerate setup for integrated IP/optical performance and SLA monitoring with serviceaware diagnostics that validate endtoend services and IP/optical paths.
Prevent service degradation through endtoend power control, monitoring, tracing. and fault localization.
Correlate faults to identify whether the problem resides in the IP or optical layer, and the root cause. This function simplifies troubleshooting and isolates problems before
services are affected.

5620 SAM system architecture
A basic 5620 SAM system has client, server, and database components that are deployed in a standalone or redundant configuration. Figure 21 shows a simple 5620 SAM
management network, which contains the 5620 SAM components, and a managed network of NEs.
Figure 21 Standalone 5620 SAM system


A 5620 SAM operator performs network management or system administration tasks using a GUI or OSS client that connects to a main server. The main server sends and
receives NE management traffic, and directs optional auxiliary servers to perform tasks such as NE statistics collection. Main and auxiliary servers store information in the same
5620 SAM database.
See the 5620 SAM System Architecture Guide for detailed system design information.

Network management modules
The 5620 SAM provides network management functionality using the following modules:
SAMA—OAM tools, service assurance functions, fault correlation using alarms, topology views, and statistics management
SAME—device mediation, equipment navigation and management, security, CLI access, backup and restore, alarm management, realtime equipment statistics, and
inventory and reporting
SAMO—OSSI package that includes an HTTP SOAP interface for general network management and configuration, a subscriptionbased JMS interface for event
monitoring, and 3GPPcompliant CORBA and TAO interfaces for LTE network management
SAMP—service provisioning, templates, and management of customers, subscribers, tunnels, paths, and policies
Mobile Services Package—LTEspecific package for LTE NE discovery and LTE network management

2.2 About this guide
The 5620 SAM User Guide provides information about using the 5620 SAM to manage serviceaware IP/MPLS networks, including GUI operations, device and network
management, and policy and service management.
This guide contains the following volumes:
Getting started—contains general 5620 SAM information including the following:
a system overview
basic GUI operation instructions
workspace customization
GUI map management
Device management—contains information about device functions that are not directly related to networking, including the following:
device support
preparing devices for 5620 SAM management
5620 SAM device and equipment management functions
Network management—contains information about network functions including the following:
general routing and forwarding
protocolspecific routing and forwarding
traffic management using MPLS and service tunnels
NE redundancy
Policy management—contains information about configuring and applying 5620 SAM policies that define rules for NE, network, or 5620 SAM operation
Service management—contains information about configuring and managing customer services.
Service assurance—contains information about the proactive detection of service degradation and SLA verification including the following:
service verification using the STM and specific OAM diagnostic tests
networking troubleshooting activities including fault detection, fault verification, and fault isolation
rootcause analysis audits of services and physical links
service throughput configuration
3. 3 — 5620 SAM GUI overview
3.1 5620 SAM GUI overview
3.2 5620 SAM forms
3.3 5620 SAM GUI opening and closing procedures
3.4 Basic 5620 SAM GUI operation procedures
3.5 5620 SAM GUI user preferences configuration procedures
3.6 5620 SAM searches
3.7 5620 SAM search procedures

3.1 5620 SAM GUI overview
The GUI on a 5620 SAM client station allows you to use a standard keyboard and pointandclick operations to perform device, network, policy and service management
functions. The GUI simplifies operations such as service configuration, OAM, alarm management, security, statistics, and other functions by allowing pointandclick selection
and intuitive data entry, rather than using a CLI. Multiple 5620 SAM GUI clients can connect to a 5620 SAM server.
This chapter describes the 5620 SAM GUI basic features, forms, and search functions, and provides procedures for opening and closing the GUI, basic GUI operations,
managing the display of information on the GUI, setting user preferences, and performing searches.

GUI workspace elements
The main GUI window displays standard workspace elements such as a menu bar, toolbar, taskbar, and status bar. Three windows within the main GUI window display the
navigation tree, topology map, and alarm window. The workspace elements of the main GUI window are shown in Figure 31.
Figure 31 Workspace elements of the main GUI window

Navigation tree
The navigation tree lists the managed equipment, services, protocols, and other objects that are configured on the network. By expanding the tree, you can navigate to and select
network objects for configuration or to view information. You can open up to five navigation tree windows at one time.
See chapter 5 for more information about the navigation tree.

Topology map
The topology map provides a view of network elements and connections. You can arrange elements on the map and create equipment groups to suit your requirements. You can
select map objects and use contextual menus for configuration or to view information. You can open multiple topology map windows at one time.
See chapter 6 for more information about the topology map.

Alarm window
The alarm window displays a dynamic list of incoming alarms from network components, and allows you to manage alarms. You can open up to six alarm windows at one time.
See chapter 38 for more information about the alarm window.

Windows and forms
The navigation tree, topology map, and alarm window are displayed in windows. CLI sessions and some other types of information also appear in windows in the GUI.
The 5620 SAM displays forms in response to menu options or other onscreen selections. Forms are typically used to configure parameters and to view information. Forms allow
configurations, display lists and searches, and provide other options; see "5620 SAM forms" in this chapter.
The 5620 SAM GUI provides floating windows and forms that you can move, resize, hide, and bring to the foreground to optimize the workspace. For information about managing
the display of windows and forms, see Procedure 36. A window or form in the GUI can be moved out of the main workspace and managed as an external window on a second
monitor; see Procedure 38.
All currently open windows and forms, except external windows, are represented by icons on the 5620 SAM taskbar. All currently open windows and forms, including external
windows, are listed in the Window menu of the 5620 SAM main menu.
Messages, warnings, dialogs, and other information appear in popup windows in the GUI, but are not managed as floating windows.

Main menu bar
The main menu bar contains menus and submenus that allow you to navigate to the forms required to perform many 5620 SAM functions. The available menu items vary
depending on licensing and the scope of command role of the current user.

Toolbar
The toolbar contains icons that allow you to quickly access windows and forms. The icons represent menus or menu items in the 5620 SAM main menu. When a button
represents a menu, the button displays the name of the menu. Clicking the button opens a dropdown of the associated menu items. When an icon represents a menu item with
no submenu items, clicking the icon opens the associated form or window. You can set user preferences to show or hide the toolbar; see Procedure 316. You can customize the
toolbar as part of a custom workspace; see Procedure 46.

5620 SAM objects
The term “object” in the 5620 SAM typically refers to an entity on the network, such as an NE, card, port, routing instance, or any other physical or logical object that is displayed
in the navigation tree or map. The term “object” can also refer to entities in the 5620 SAM, such as policies, tests, or other objects that are displayed in lists or on configuration
forms.

Contextual menus
Contextual menus appear when you rightclick certain objects or areas in the GUI; for example, in the navigation tree, topology map, and alarm window. Contextual menus allow
you to perform actions that are specific to the object or area.

Tooltips
The 5620 SAM provides tooltips to identify many icons, buttons, fields and other GUI elements. When you mouse over these elements, information is displayed.

Custom workspaces
The 5620 SAM supports custom workspaces that allow you to configure and arrange workspace elements to suit your operational requirements. You can save and select custom
workspaces and update saved workspaces after a 5620 SAM upgrade. You must have the required scope of command permissions to customize workspaces. Permissions for
workspaces are set by a system administrator. See chapter 4 for more information about custom workspaces.

Shortcut keys and accessibility
You can use shortcut keys to open menu items and perform other actions. To open menu items, simultaneously press ALT[key] where [key] is the underlined letter of a displayed
menu item. For example, when the main menu is displayed, pressing ALTp opens the Policies menu. The 5620 SAM supports many conventional shortcut keys for accessibility.

Span of control
The GUI displays objects and allows object configuration based on the span of control of the user and user preferences. By default, the GUI displays the objects that are
included in the View Access and Edit Access spans of the current user. To reduce the number of objects displayed, you can configure user preferences to show only the objects
in the Edit Access span of control of the user; see Procedure 316. The user preferences setting affects the display of objects in the alarm window, navigation tree, topology
map, and list forms. You can temporarily override the user preferences setting when you configure filters to search lists; see Procedure 332.
For more information about span of control, see “To create a span of control” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide.

5620 SAM clipboard
As well as the standard clipboard functions for copying text, the 5620 SAM provides a clipboard function that copies property form identifiers. A property form identifier is a
unique internal address that the 5620 SAM assigns to a property form.
Identifiers are copied to the clipboard using the Clipboard icon or the Copy to Clipboard option in a contextual menu. You can use the clipboard to open forms, send identifiers to
other users or applications, and configure search filters. On the topology map, you can use the clipboard to search for objects and create physical links; see chapter 6.
For more information about the 5620 SAM clipboard, see Procedure 313.

Text messages
Users can send broadcast messages to some or all active GUI users logged into the 5620 SAM. This is useful for sending maintenance and similar notifications to other users.
See Procedure 39 and “To send a broadcast message to 5620 SAM GUI users” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide for more information.

User preferences
The 5620 SAM allows you to configure workspace elements and functions to suit your operational requirements. You can set many preferences using the User Preferences form
accessed from the main menu. User preferences are specific to a particular user; the settings are associated with the user ID and are applied to the system when that user is
logged in. See Procedure 316 for more information about user preferences.
You can set tab preferences to show or hide tabs on forms; see Procedure 317. You can also configure custom workspaces; see chapter 4.

Task manager
The task manager allows you to monitor the progress of operational tasks. The task manager monitors the following operations:
all write operations that are performed from the GUI; for example, when you click on the Apply or OK buttons
all write operations that are performed using the OSSI
some read operations; for example, when you click on the Resync or Collect All buttons
A 5620 SAM administrator can change the task manager settings. See “To change the 5620 SAM Task Manager settings” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide.
See Procedure 314 for more information about the task manager.

Localized language support
The GUI supports localized language display. Localized language display, also known as internationalization, displays GUI text in a specified language. The localized language
setting applies to most GUI objects, except system components and database objects. Contact AlcatelLucent technical support for more information about localized language
support.
Note 1 The 5620 SAM supports localized language settings using predefined strings, and does not translate data to different languages.
Note 2 The 5620 SAMO does not support language localization.
3.2 5620 SAM forms
The 5620 SAM displays forms in response to menu options or other onscreen selections. Forms display lists or allow you to view and configure properties. Some forms display
other information.
The GUI displays the following form types:
list forms
configuration forms
step forms
property forms
problems encountered forms
other forms such as messages, warnings, or dialog boxes. These forms are also sometimes referred to as windows.
See Figures 32 and 35 for examples of 5620 SAM forms.
Forms can be sized, positioned, and managed using standard OS functions and 5620 SAM display features; see Procedure 36. A form can be displayed anywhere in the GUI. A
newly opened form is displayed in the foreground. You can do the following:
organize forms according to your preferences
compare information on multiple open forms
navigate quickly to another open form
save a set of open forms and reopen them later with one operation, to provide quick access to forms that you use often; see Procedure 37.
Forms are identified by a titlebar at the top. The displayed form name is the name specified during object creation. If the object is not named, a default name is used. When a
form is minimized to the taskbar, a tool tip on the taskbar icon of the form displays the title bar information. The Window menu on the main menu lists all open forms.
Forms typically contain tabs, buttons, fields, and other elements that you can click to perform actions, depending on the form type. When these elements are not available or not
applicable, they are dimmed.

More Actions button
Buttons that perform various functions appear at the bottom of configuration forms and on the right side of list forms. When a form is resized to a smaller size, or when there are
too many buttons to fit in the available space, some of the buttons are consolidated into a More Actions button. The consolidated buttons are available as menu items when you
click on the More Actions button; see Figures 32 and 35.

List forms
A list form displays a list of objects in response to a menu option, tab, or other onscreen selection. Figure 32 shows the features of a list form.
Some list forms populate automatically; for others, you must click Search to see results.
Figure 32 List form

Some list forms contain an object type dropdown that allows you to select the type of objects in the list. When an object type dropdown menu contains more than ten items,
you can apply a filter to reduce the number of dropdown items; see Procedure 331. You can customize the object dropdown and select the default object type in a custom
workspace; see Procedure 49.
Objects on a list form are displayed in table format. The column headings correspond to the attributes (parameters) for the object, for example, the Customer ID for a service.
The column headings vary depending on the object type. Each object in the list is displayed in a row, showing the values for the attributes of the object. On some forms, the first
column on the left displays a deployment icon for an item, when required; see "Object deployment status" in chapter 13.
Objects are displayed based on the span of control of a user and user preferences. See "Span of control" in this chapter.
List forms can contain many objects, in some cases hundreds or thousands. You can reduce the number of items in a list using search filters; see "5620 SAM searches" in this
chapter. Most list forms display the time at which the last search was performed on the form.
List forms typically display a column of buttons along the right side. On some list forms, not all buttons are displayed, but you can access them using the More Actions button.
See "More Actions button" in this section.
Many list forms contain a Customize button that allows you to quickly make changes to the list form default settings in a custom workspace. See Procedure 49 for more
information.
The 5620 SAM provides features that allow you to manage the display of listed results and to set and save your display configuration. See "Managing search results and lists" in
this chapter, and Procedure 322. You can also save the results to a file; see Procedure 315.
You can set the following user preferences for list forms:
number of items per page
object display based on user span of control
default file extension for saving listed information
See Procedure 316 for more information about user preferences.

Configuration forms
Configuration forms allow you to create and modify 5620 SAM objects and to view information about objects; see Procedure 310. Figure 35 describes the main features of a
configuration form in the 5620 SAM.
When you first create an object in the 5620 SAM, you use a configuration form to enter values for the parameters that define the object. For example, when you create a service,
you use a service configuration form; when you create a policy, you use a policy configuration form. After object creation, the form associated with the object is typically called a
property form. See "Property forms" in this section.
You can set user preferences to suppress warnings and messages for configuration forms; see Procedure 316.

Step forms
Some configuration activities lead the operator through a series of forms, each of which represents a step in the configuration process. Such a form is called a step form. You
must click on the Next button to proceed to the next step. Figure 33 shows the first step in a step form sequence. When the configuration sequence is complete, you must click
on the Finish button to commit the changes.
Figure 33 Step form

Some steps open a new step form. You must complete the steps in the new form before you can return to the previous form. After you click Finish on the new form, the previous
form reappears.

Tabs
Configuration forms typically display tabs. You can use the tabs to open related forms for additional configurations or to open lists or view other information, such as deployment
or fault status. Property forms allow you to show or hide tabs to suit your requirements, and to set preferences for tab display; see "Tab preferences" in this section.

Collapsible panels
Configuration forms are often subdivided into specific information areas using panels. Panels are framed by border lines, with a title bar at the top that identifies the panel. Panels
can be collapsed to hide areas that are not of interest, or expanded to display all information on a tab or form; see Procedure 310.
When a configuration form closes, the current state of the panel is saved for that object type. When a user opens a configuration form, the last saved state of the panel is
displayed.

Parameters
When you create or modify an object, you typically configure parameters, sometimes referred to as attributes. Parameter settings define the properties of an object. Some
parameters are readonly, and cannot be configured. Configurable parameters typically display a white field, check box, or drop down arrow. Mandatory fields are yellow. Read
only parameter values display in a grey field. Nonapplicable parameters are dimmed. See Procedure 310 for more information about parameters.

Parameter Search Tool
The Parameter Search Tool is part of the online user documentation that is available under Help User Documentation in the 5620 SAM GUI main menu. The Parameter Search
Tool provides information about parameters and configuration forms in the 5620 SAM. See Procedure 330 for more information.
The Parameter Search Tool does not include information about some types of forms or parameters that are specific to the 5620 SAM, such as:
user preferences
system preferences
OLC state
Faults or Deployment tabs
Additional information about 5620 SAM parameters, including those not found in the Parameter Search Tool, is available in the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide.

Saving configurations
When you complete a configuration, you can click OK, Apply, or other buttons to save the configured values. When you click the OK button, the information is saved and the
form closes. When you click the Apply button, the information is saved and the form remains open to allow you to perform additional actions. See Procedure 310 for more
information.

Warning and confirmation messages
When you save configuration changes or close a form, the 5620 SAM typically displays a warning or confirmation message. You must acknowledge the message. Not all
configurations require confirmation.
When you save changes for a child object configuration form that was launched from a parent object form, the 5620 SAM displays a warning that the changes are not committed
until the parent object form (called the containing window) is also saved. You must acknowledge the warning. You can set user preferences to suppress containing window
warnings; see Procedure 316. If you then attempt to close the parent form without saving it first, the 5620 SAM displays a warning, regardless of the user preferences setting.

Indicators and icons
Indicators and icons inform you of activity that is in progress or requires attention, and can appear and disappear depending on the activity that is occurring in the 5620 SAM, as
shown in Figure 34.
Figure 34 Indicators and icons

A yellow asterisk icon on a tab or panel title bar indicates that a field contains incorrect data, or that a mandatory field requires data.
A warning indicator appears on the Faults tab for an object when the 5620 SAM has raised alarms against the object or a related object.
A warning indicator appears on the Deployment tab when a configuration change is not fully deployed to an NE.
When a deployment is in progress or has failed, a deployment icon appears beside parameters on an object properties form, and beside affected objects in the navigation tree, on
info tables in map views, and in list forms. See "Object deployment status" in chapter 13 for more information.
The Additional Text Find icon is available on property forms. You can configure an additional text policy to automatically display specific information about an alarmed object. The
information is displayed in the additional text column of the dynamic alarm list, and on the Alarm Info form. See Procedure 385 for more information.

Action buttons
Configuration forms typically have a row of action buttons along the bottom. The available buttons vary depending on the form. The Find icon is available on all configuration
forms, and allows you to quickly locate a specific tab, panel, or parameter; see Procedure 329. On some configuration forms, not all buttons are displayed, but you can access
them using the More Actions button. See "More Actions button" in this section.

Configuration forms with builtin navigation trees
Services and NEs typically require configuration at several levels of the service or equipment object tree. For example, when you create a service, you configure parameters at
the service, site, and interface levels. NEs require configuration at the device, shelf, card, and port levels; see chapter 13.
5620 SAM service configuration and NE property forms display a navigation tree on the left side of the form, which provides quick access to service and NE objects. Other
object types also display navigation trees in configuration or property forms. See section 5.1 for information about using navigation trees. Objects in the tree provide access to
configuration forms using contextual menus.
Service navigation trees for VPLS, IVPLS, BVPLS, MVPLS, IES, and VPRNs display a maximum of 50 access interfaces, SAPs, MSAPs, subscriber SAPs, and spoke and
mesh SDP bindings at a time. When this limit is reached, you can click on the message beside the containing object under which the SAPs or access interfaces are listed to
open a tab with the full list of objects.
Figure 35 shows an example of a service configuration form with a builtin navigation tree.
Figure 35 Service configuration form with builtin tree


When you first open a configuration form with a builtin navigation tree, the form is unlocked. When you select another object in the tree, a form for the selected object replaces
the unlocked form of the previous object. You can lock forms to keep them open when you select additional objects. The form for each object is displayed as a tab in the main
configuration form.
You can undock tabs to detach them from the main configuration form. Undocked tabs are displayed as separate forms and are managed like other standard form in the 5620
SAM. You cannot undock Create forms, tabs for object type lists, or tabs with unsaved changes.
See Procedure 311 for more information about managing configuration forms with builtin navigation trees.

Modifying configuration forms with builtin navigation trees
When you modify a docked configuration form, it becomes locked. The lock icon appears in orange until the changes are saved. An orange lock icon indicates unsaved changes
on the form. You cannot undock tabs with orange lock icons. When you save the changes, the form remains locked but the icon is no longer orange.
If you attempt to close a modified configuration form that contains unsaved changes, a message prompts you to specify whether to discard the changes or return to the display.
If you attempt to close a modified configuration form that has related forms with unsaved modifications, the message lists the forms that have unsaved changes.
For service configuration forms, if an object is added to the service configuration, the new object appears in the builtin navigation tree and the configuration form is displayed
with the orange lock icon. The icon remains orange until the modifications are saved or discarded.
For NE property forms, if an object is added from the navigation tree, the change will be made immediately. However, if a change, such as adding or removing an object, is made
to an equipment configuration form, the change will be reflected on the form immediately, but it will not be reflected on the navigation tree until the OK, Apply, or Apply Tab button
is clicked.
Note Changes implemented by pressing the OK or Apply buttons affect all tabs in the form. For some configuration forms, you can click the Apply Tab button to
save changes for the current objectlevel tab and related objects. A message lists the affected objects.
If you save a set of forms for quick access when child forms are displayed as tabs in a parent form, all of the child tabs are saved as separate forms. When you reopen the
forms, the child tabs are displayed as separate forms. See Procedure 37.

Property forms
Configuration forms for objects that already exist in the 5620 SAM (NEs for example) are typically called property forms. You can access property forms by using contextual
menus, the Properties button on list forms, or by doubleclicking on objects in the topology map or objects in the navigation tree that have no child objects.
A property form has a property form identifier that you can copy to the clipboard and paste for various functions; see Procedure 313.
Most property forms contain tabs that provide specific information. The Deployment tab allows you to monitor the deployment status of an object; see "Object deployment
status" in chapter 13. The Faults tab contains information about alarms for the object; see chapter 38.

Tab preferences
Some 5620 SAM property forms contain numerous tabs, which you can display, hide, and arrange in a preferred sequence according to your operational requirements. On some
forms, tabs are hidden by default. You can temporarily display hidden tabs, and you can configure and save your tab display preferences; see Procedures 317 and 318.
You can configure a workspace to use local tab preferences or custom tab preferences. Local tab preferences are configured using the tab selector and are saved for a specific
user. When your current workspace uses local tab preferences, saved local tab preferences become the default that is displayed when a form opens. Custom tab preferences are
saved as part of the workspace, and are not userspecific. See Procedure 44.
Local tab preferences can be exported and shared; see Procedures 319 and 320.
An administrator can configure system preferences to enable or disable tab preferences and to define the default local behavior for hidden tabs, See “System preferences
configuration procedures” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide.

NE sessions
You can open a CLI window using the Telnet Session or SSH Session button on NE property forms. You can access the NE file system using the File Browser button. These
options are also available using the contextual menu for NE objects in the navigation tree.

User Activity button
The User Activity button opens a form that lists the recent 5620 SAM user actions performed on the object. See “User activity logging” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator
Guide for more information.

Resync button
The Resync button on a property form resynchronizes the data in the 5620 SAM with the current state of the corresponding object. The 5620 SAM requests the configuration
from the object and updates the 5620 SAM network model accordingly. Resynchronization does not affect the contents of the historical statistics database.

Turn Up and Shut Down buttons
The Turn Up and Shut Down buttons on some property forms provide a convenient method for changing the administrative state of an object. When you click the Turn Up or Shut
Down buttons, the change is effected immediately. When you modify the Administrative State parameter, the change is not effected until you click the OK or Apply button for the
form.

Multiedit property forms
The 5620 SAM provides a multiedit function that allows you to select multiple objects at one time for editing of specific properties. The objects must be of the same type (for
example, services must all be VPRN, not a mixture of VPRN and other service types). When you multiselect and click Properties, a Multiple instances (Edit) property form
opens. See Procedure 312 for more information.
The 5620 SAM also provides a bulk operations function; see chapter 21.

Problems encountered notifications
When you enter a faulty configuration or instruction in the 5620 SAM, a Problems Encountered form may open. The Problems Encountered form displays problems in a list. You
can doubleclick on a problem entry, or select and click Properties to display a property form with more information about the problem. The Problems Encountered form contains a
Deployment button that you can click to access the Deployment form for additional information and actions; see Procedure 262 for more information. You can copy the property
form identifier for the Problems Encountered form to the 5620 SAM clipboard; see Procedure 313.

3.3 5620 SAM GUI opening and closing procedures
The following procedures describe how to open and close the 5620 SAM GUI.

Procedure 31 To open a singleuser GUI client on a Windows station
Note 1 You can install more than one singleuser client on a station, but you can run only one client instance of a release at a time. For example, a Release 12.0
client and a Release 13.0 client can be open at the same time, but not two Release 13.0 R1 clients.
Note 2 To perform this procedure, you must be one of the following:
the user who installed the client software
a user with sufficient permissions on the client files and directories, such as a local administrator
1. Open the 5620 SAM client. Perform one of the following:
a. Doubleclick on the 5620 SAM Client App icon on the Windows desktop.
b. Start the client GUI using a web browser.
i. Use the browser to open one of the following URLs:
http://server:8085/client, if SSL is not enabled
https://server:8444/client, if SSL is enabled
where server is the IP address or hostname of the 5620 SAM main server
The page shown in Figure 36 is displayed.
Figure 36 5620 SAM client page

ii. Click on the “Install or Launch 5620 SAM Client” link.
iii. If you did not use a web browser to install the client, a form opens and prompts you for the client installation location. Use the form to specify the client
installation directory, for example, C:\5620sam\client.
c. Start the client GUI using a CLI.
Note Using a CLI to start the client GUI allows you to specify one or more client startup options.
i. Open a command window.
ii. Enter the following:
cd /d path\nms\bin
where path is the 5620 SAM client installation location, typically C:\5620sam\client
iii. Enter the following to start the 5620 SAM client using one or more startup options:
nmsclient.bat option1 option2 ... optionN
where option1 option2 ... optionN represents one or more of the startup options listed in Table 31
For example, to force a client update, enter the following:
nmsclient.bat update
Table 31 5620 SAM client startup options for Windows
Option Description

user The 5620 SAM client will automatically attempt to log in with the specified user login name, when used with
the password option. If the password option is not specified, the user will be prompted for a password at the
login window.

password The 5620 SAM client attempts to log in with the specified password. This option can be used only in

conjunction with the user option.(1)

nms_version Displays the client software version

baseLocale Starts the client using the base OS locale for string resources such as language, number, date, and time
formats

secure Starts the client using HTTPS to connect to the server

server Starts the client and specifies the 5620 SAM servers that the client is to check for an update
<server:port;server:port...> where

server is an IP address or a DNS name
port is an HTTP or HTTPS port on the server

update Starts the client and forces the download and installation of the updated client files. This option overrides the
local client configuration to ensure that the client and server configurations match. This option is useful for
restoring a corrupted client installation. You can restore local configuration variances after the update.

retryCount Starts the client and specifies the number of times to attempt to download a client update

noupdate Starts the client without performing an update. This option is useful for preserving a specific client
configuration that differs from the server configuration.

keepConfig Starts the client and performs an update, but does not permit the overwriting of the nms*.xml configuration
files in the install_dir\nms\config directory, where install_dir is the 5620 SAM client installation directory,
typically C:\5620sam\client
After this option is specified, it remains in effect until the client is started using the “update” option, which
then remains in effect.

keepSpecified Specifies that the files listed in install_dir\nms\config\keepFile.txt are not to be overwritten during a client
update, where install_dir is the 5620 SAM client installation location, typically C:\5620sam\client
The keepFile.txt file must contain only one file entry per line, and each entry must be an absolute file path.

connectTimeout [timeout] Specifies a timeout value, in ms, that the client uses for a downloadserver connection attempt. If the client
cannot connect to a server within the timeout period, the operation is aborted. The default is 3000, which
specifies 3 s.
The maximum connection timeout in Windows is 20 s.

readTimeout [timeout] Specifies a timeout value, in ms, that the client uses for a downloadserver file read attempt. If the client
cannot obtain a server response to a file request within the timeout period, the file request is aborted. The
default is 3000, which specifies 3 s.
The maximum read timeout in Windows is 20 s.

help Displays the nmsclient.bat usage information and options

Note
1. The security implications of using the password option must be fully considered before it is used.
The 5620 SAM client login form opens. If SSL is enabled, the form displays a padlock icon, as shown in Figure 37.
Figure 37 Client GUI login form
2. Choose the appropriate 5620 SAM main server from the Servers dropdown menu.
Note To display multiple 5620 SAM system options in the Servers dropdown menu, you must configure the client to support multiple server options. See
“To configure the display of multiple 5620 SAM systems as client GUI login options” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide for information.
3. Enter the required Login Name and Password information.
Note 1 If this is the first time that a client connects to the server, you must use admin as the login name. Contact your AlcatelLucent technical support
representative for the default 5620 SAM user account information.
Note 2 The login name and password used depend on whether client GUI users are authenticated locally or remotely, as determined by the system
administrator. Use the login name and password provided by your system administrator.
4. Click Login. The 5620 SAM GUI opens.
5. If the 5620 SAM server is at a higher major release level than the client, the autoupdate function may display a dialog box that asks whether you need to remove an older
version of JRE. If this occurs, perform one of the following.
a. If there is no longer a need for the client to connect to a main server at the older 5620 SAM release level, click Yes. The older JRE version is removed.
b. If the client is required for connecting to a main server at the older 5620 SAM release level, click No. The older JRE version is retained.
If you have trouble opening the GUI, see the 5620 SAM Troubleshooting Guide.

Procedure 32 To open a singleuser GUI client on a RHEL station
Note 1 You can install more than one singleuser client on a station, but you can run only one client instance of a release at a time. For example, a Release 12.0
client and a Release 13.0 client can be open at the same time, but not two Release 13.0 R1 clients.
Note 2 To perform this procedure, you must be one of the following:
the user who installed the client software
another user who has read, write, and execute permissions on the client files and directories
1. Open the 5620 SAM client. Perform one of the following:
a. Doubleclick on the 5620 SAM Client App icon on the desktop.
b. Start the client GUI using a web browser.
i. Use the browser to open one of the following URLs:
http://server:8085/client, if SSL is not enabled
https://server:8444/client, if SSL is enabled
where server is the IP address or hostname of the 5620 SAM main server
The page shown in Figure 38 is displayed.
Figure 38 5620 SAM client page
ii. Click on the “Install or Launch 5620 SAM Client” link.
iii. If you did not use a web browser to install the client, a form opens and prompts you for the client installation location. Use the form to specify the current
client installation directory, for example, /opt/5620sam/client.
c. Start the client GUI using a CLI.
Note Using a CLI to start the client GUI allows you to specify one or more client startup options.
i. Open a bash console window on the client station.
ii. Enter the following:
cd path/nms/bin
where path is the 5620 SAM client installation location, typically /opt/5620sam/client
iii. To specify one or more client startup options, enter the following:
./nmsclient.bash option1 option2 ... optionN
where option1 option2 ... optionN represents one or more of the startup options listed in Table 32
For example, to force a client update, enter the following:
./nmsclient.bash update
Table 32 5620 SAM client startup options for RHEL
Option Description

user The 5620 SAM client will automatically attempt to log in with the specified user login name, when used with
the password option. If the password option is not specified, the user will be prompted for a password at the
login window.

password The 5620 SAM client attempts to log in with the specified password. This option can be used only in
conjunction with the user option. Consider fully the security implications before using the password option.

nms_version Displays the client software version

baseLocale Starts the client using the base OS locale for string resources such as language, number, date, and time
formats

secure Starts the client using HTTPS to connect to the server

server Starts the client and specifies the 5620 SAM servers that the client is to check for an update
<server:port;server:port...> where

server is an IP address or a DNS name
port is an HTTP or HTTPS port on the server

update Starts the client and forces the download and installation of the updated client files. This option overrides the
local client configuration to ensure that the client and server configurations match. This option is useful for
restoring a corrupted client installation. You can restore local configuration variances after the update.

retryCount Starts the client and specifies the number of times to attempt to download a client update

noupdate Starts the client without performing an update. This option is useful for preserving a specific client
configuration that differs from the server configuration.

keepConfig Starts the client and performs an update, but does not permit the overwriting of the nms*.xml configuration
files in the install_dir/nms/config directory, where install_dir is the 5620 SAM client installation directory,
typically /opt/5620sam/client
After this option is specified, it remains in effect until the client is started using the “update” option, which
then remains in effect.

keepSpecified Specifies that the files listed in install_dir/nms/config/keepFile.txt are not to be overwritten during a client
update, where install_dir is the 5620 SAM client installation location, typically /opt/5620sam/client
The keepFile.txt file must contain only one file entry per line, and each entry must be an absolute file path.

connectTimeout [timeout] Specifies a timeout value, in ms, that the client uses for a downloadserver connection attempt. If the client
cannot connect to a server within the timeout period, the operation is aborted. The default is 3000, which
specifies 3 s.

readTimeout [timeout] Specifies a timeout value, in ms, that the client uses for a downloadserver file read attempt. If the client
cannot obtain a server response to a file request within the timeout period, the file request is aborted. The
default is 3000, which specifies 3 s.

help Displays the nmsclient.bash usage information and options

The 5620 SAM client login form opens. If SSL is enabled, the form displays a padlock icon, as shown in Figure 39.
Figure 39 Client GUI login form

2. Choose the appropriate 5620 SAM main server from the Servers dropdown menu.
Note To display multiple 5620 SAM system options in the Servers dropdown menu, you must configure the client to support multiple server options. See
“To configure the display of multiple 5620 SAM systems as client GUI login options” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide for more information.
3. Enter the Login Name and Password information required for the server.
Note 1 If this is the first time that a client connects to the server, you must use admin as the login name. Contact your AlcatelLucent technical support
representative for the default 5620 SAM user account information.
Note 2 The login credentials that are required depend on whether local or remote user authentication is used for the GUI client. Use the login name and
password provided by your system administrator.
4. Click Login. The 5620 SAM GUI opens.
5. If the 5620 SAM server is at a higher major release level than the client, the autoupdate function may display a dialog box that asks whether you need to remove an older
version of JRE. If this occurs, perform one of the following.
a. If there is no longer a need for the client to connect to a main server at the older 5620 SAM release level, click Yes. The older JRE version is removed.
b. If the client is required for connecting to a main server at the older 5620 SAM release level, click No. The older JRE version is retained.
If you have trouble opening the GUI, see the 5620 SAM Troubleshooting Guide.

Procedure 33 To open a client GUI through a client delegate server
Perform this procedure to open a 5620 SAM client GUI using the 5620 SAM client delegate server software on another station.
1. If you are not in the same physical facility as the client delegate server, log in to the facility using the appropriate access tool, for example, a Citrix gateway.
2. Log in to the client delegate server station.
Note To specify a client startup option that updates the client software or configuration on a client delegate server, you must be logged in as one of the
following users, or the update fails:
on a RHEL station—root
on a Windows station—the user who installed the client delegate server software, or a local administrator
3. If the client delegate server is installed on a RHEL station, redirect the display to the station that you are using. See the RHEL documentation for information.
4. Perform one of the following to open the GUI.
a. Procedure 31, if the client delegate server is on a Windows station
b. Procedure 32, if the client delegate server is on a RHEL station

Procedure 34 To change to a different 5620 SAM client GUI user
Perform this procedure to change the 5620 SAM user currently logged in to the client GUI.
1. Choose Application Switch User from the 5620 SAM main menu. A dialog box appears.
2. Select the Save opened configuration forms check box, if required. See Procedure 37 for more information.
3. Click Yes. The GUI restarts and displays the login form.
4. Log in using the required credentials. The client GUI opens.

Procedure 35 To close the 5620 SAM GUI
1. Choose Application Exit from the 5620 SAM main menu. A dialog box appears.
2. Select the Save opened configuration forms check box, if required. See Procedure 37 for more information.
3. Click Yes. The GUI application closes.

3.4 Basic 5620 SAM GUI operation procedures
The following procedures describe how to navigate and operate the 5620 SAM GUI.

Procedure 36 To manage the display of windows and forms
The 5620 SAM displays information in windows and forms. You can rearrange the display of windows and forms to optimize your workspace. You can also save window layouts
in custom workspaces; see Procedure 43.
Open windows and forms display an icon on the 5620 SAM taskbar, and are listed in the Window menu of the 5620 SAM main menu. You can resize, minimize, activate, and
close windows and forms using standard OS methods. The following procedure describes additional methods for managing internal windows and forms. To manage a window or
form as an external window, see Procedure 38.
1. To open the navigation tree, topology map, or alarm window, perform one of the following:
a. Click on the toolbar icon for the required window.
If the toolbar is hidden, you can modify user preferences to show the toolbar; see Procedure 316. If the toolbar does not contain the required icon, see information
about custom workspaces in chapter 4.
b. Choose Application, then the name of the required window from the 5620 SAM main menu.
c. Use the shortcut keys; see "Shortcut keys and accessibility" in section 3.1.
2. To make a window or form the active window, choose Window from the 5620 SAM main menu, then choose the name of the required window.
3. To arrange multiple open forms so that they overlap, perform one of the following:
a. Choose Window Cascade & Reset to Preferred Sizes from the 5620 SAM main menu. The forms are displayed overlapping in their existing sizes, showing the
titlebar for each form.
b. Choose Window Cascade from the 5620 SAM main menu. The forms are displayed overlapping and equally sized, showing the titlebar for each form.

When forms are arranged using the Cascade and Tile options, the navigation tree, topology map, and alarm window are affected, along with any open forms. Minimized
windows and forms and external windows are not affected.
4. To arrange multiple open forms without overlapping, perform one of the following:
a. Choose Window Tile Vertical from the 5620 SAM main menu. The forms are displayed side by side.
b. Choose Window Tile Horizontal from the 5620 SAM main menu. The forms are displayed one above the other.
c. Choose Window Tile Square from the 5620 SAM main menu. The forms are displayed in a grid.

5. To minimize all open windows and forms to the taskbar, choose Window Minimize All from the 5620 SAM main menu.
6. To restore windows and forms to their preferred settings, choose Window Reset to Preferred Sizes from the 5620 SAM main menu.
7. To close all open windows and forms, choose Window Close All Internal Windows from the 5620 SAM main menu. External windows are not affected.

When you close all internal windows, the navigation tree, topology map, and alarm window are closed. To reopen them, see step 1.

Procedure 37 To save or open a set of forms for quick access
You can save a set of open forms and reopen them all later with one operation, to provide quick access to forms that you use often or need to return to.
Consider the following when you save a set of forms for quick access.
Only configuration forms that support a property form identifier are saved in the set. See "5620 SAM clipboard" in section 3.1.
When quickaccess forms are reopened, they may not appear exactly as they did when they were saved. The size and location of configuration forms is not preserved.
The current values and configurations may be different from those in effect at the time the set of forms was saved.
If an object is deleted from 5620 SAM management, the configuration form for that object is removed from the saved set of forms.
Open configuration forms that are displayed in external windows are saved with the set of quickaccess forms, but they are displayed as internal windows when the forms
are reopened.
All quickaccess forms display an icon on the taskbar when reopened.
If you save a set of forms when child forms are displayed as tabs in a parent form, all of the child tabs are saved as separate forms. When you reopen the forms, the child
tabs are displayed as separate forms. See Procedure 311 for more information.
Caution Network activity can cause changes to quickaccess forms when they are not open. When reopened, the saved forms may collectively exceed the
memory threshold for the 5620 SAM GUI.
AlcatelLucent recommends that you limit the number of quickaccess forms in a set. Close any unnecessary forms before you save the set of open forms. When
you save a parent form, consider whether you need to save the open child forms (tabs).
If you exceed the memory threshold, restart the 5620 SAM client, then save a reduced number of quick access forms.
1. To save a set of open forms:
i. Open the configuration forms you need to save for quick access and close any unnecessary forms.
ii. Choose Window Save Opened Configuration Forms from the 5620 SAM main menu. The open forms are saved as a set of quickaccess forms.

Alternatively, when you close the 5620 SAM client or switch users, you can select the Save opened configuration forms check box in the confirmation dialog.
2. To reopen the set of quickaccess forms, choose Window Open Saved Configuration Forms from the 5620 SAM main menu. The saved set of quickaccess forms
opens.
Alternatively, you can click on the Open Saved Configuration Forms icon on the toolbar, if available.

Procedure 38 To manage a window or form as an external window
A window or form in the 5620 SAM GUI can be moved from the main workspace and managed as an external window, for example, on a second monitor.
External windows are managed by the client computer OS. External windows maintain the window icon that is used in the 5620 SAM GUI, but the icon is placed on the OS
taskbar. The 5620 SAM GUI taskbar does not display external windows, but they are listed in the 5620 SAM Window menu.
Any windows or forms that are opened from an external window appear as separate external windows.
An external window or form cannot be moved back to the 5620 SAM GUI. You must reopen the window in the 5620 SAM GUI.
1. To move a window or form to an external window:
i. Click on the required internal window or form to make it the active window.
ii. Choose Window Move to External Window from the 5620 SAM main menu.

Alternatively, you can rightclick on the title bar of the selected window and choose Move To External Window.
External windows are listed in the 5620 SAM Window menu. You can activate an external window by clicking on the window or form name in the Window menu
list.
2. To close all external windows, choose Window Close All External SAM Windows from the 5620 SAM main menu.

Procedure 39 To send a text message to other 5620 SAM users
You can send text messages to other selected 5620 SAM users or to all active users logged into the 5620 SAM server.
When you receive a message, you can click Reply to respond to the sender.
Messages are uniquely identified with the Client ID number of the sender.
1. Choose Application Text Message from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Text Message window opens.
2. Enter the text message in the text area.
You can use the 5620 SAM clipboard to send a property form identifier with the message. Copy the identifier for an object and click Paste to paste it into the message
area. You can paste multiple objects, up to a limit. If multiple objects do not paste, reduce the size of the clipboard contents. See Procedure 313 for more information
about the clipboard.
The most recent information copied to the system clipboard is pasted, even if it is not a property form identifier. If you use the system clipboard to copy text or other types
of information after you copy a property form identifier, the identifier is no longer available.
3. Click Send To. The Select Sessions form opens with a list of active client sessions displayed.
4. Select one or more users in the list. To select all GUI client sessions, click in the list and press CTRLA.
5. Click OK. The form closes and the text message is sent to the selected clients.

Procedure 310 To use configuration forms to configure or view parameters
1. To open a configuration form, use one of the following methods:
a. Choose the required 5620 SAM main menu or submenu option.
b. Rightclick on an object in the navigation tree, topology map, or alarm window and choose the required option from the contextual menu.
c. Doubleclick on the lowestlevel navigation tree object.
When you doubleclick on an object that has a child object, the tree expands to show the child object. When you doubleclick on an object that has no child objects,
the object properties form opens.
d. Doubleclick on an object in a list or on the map.
e. Select an object in a list and click Properties.
f. Choose Application Go To Property Form from the 5620 SAM main menu and paste a property form identifier from the 5620 SAM clipboard; see Procedure 313.

2. To expand or collapse panels, click on the titlebar of the panel.
You can collapse or expand all of the panels on a tabbed form. Rightclick on the tab header and choose Collapse All Panels or Expand All Panels.
When a configuration form closes, the current state of the panels is saved for that object type. When a user opens a configuration form, the last saved state of the panels
is displayed.
3. Configure or view the parameters on the form.
If the configuration form is a step form, follow the form prompts.
Note 1 A parameter field that has a yellow background is mandatory and must be configured before you can go to the next form or apply the changes on
the current form.
Note 2 Avoid colons in the name field because the 5620 SAM uses colons as separators for the object full name.
Information about 5620 SAM parameters is available in the Parameter Search Tool; see Procedure 330. Additional information is available in the 5620 SAM Parameter
Guide.
4. Save the configuration changes. Perform one of the following:
a. Click Apply to save the changes without closing the form.
b. Click OK to save the changes and close the form.
c. Click Finish to save the changes in a step form.
d. Click Cancel or Close to close the form without saving the changes.
Note Using the CTRLF4 keys to close a form may cause problems if the parent form is open. AlcatelLucent recommends that you do not use
CTRLF4 to close a form that is contained by another form or that has a parent form.
Some forms display warnings or require confirmation before changes are committed. You can configure user preferences to suppress some confirmation messages; see
Procedure 316.

Procedure 311 To manage configuration forms with builtin navigation trees
Configuration and property forms that display builtin navigation trees allow you to open multiple forms for objects at various levels of the tree. Each form is displayed as a tab in
the main configuration form. You can undock a form from the main form by undocking the tab.
See "Configuration forms with builtin navigation trees" and "Modifying configuration forms with builtin navigation trees" in this chapter for more information.
1. Open a configuration form that displays a builtin navigation tree.
When the form opens, it is unlocked, as indicated by the open lock icon on the tab header for the form.
2. To keep the form open when additional tree objects are selected, click the lock icon. Alternatively, you can rightclick on the tab header and choose Lock. The icon
indicates that the form is locked.
An unlocked form closes and is replaced when another object is selected in the tree.
3. Select additional objects in the builtin navigation tree. A configuration form for each object opens as a tab on the main configuration form. Lock each tab to keep the
corresponding form open when a new object is selected.
If the tabs of the open forms exceed the width of the window, double arrows are displayed. Click on the double arrows to display a dropdown menu of the open
configuration forms.
For service configuration forms, you can select objects in two ways:
a. Expand the tree and select an object.
b. Open an objecttype list.
An object type is an item in the tree that can be expanded to display child objects.
This method is convenient when an object type contains many child objects that require a search filter.
Note Service navigation trees for VPLS, IVPLS, BVPLS, MVPLS, IES, and VPRNs display a maximum of 50 access interfaces, SAPs, MSAPs,
subscriber SAPs, and spoke and mesh SDP bindings at a time. When this limit is reached, you can click on the message beside the containing
object under which the SAPs or access interfaces are listed to open a tab with the full list of objects.
i. Click on an object type in the tree. A list form opens as a tab and displays the objects available for the object type.
ii. Select an object in the list and click Properties. If the list form was not locked, it is automatically locked. Depending on the object type, a form for the selected
object will open as a tab in the main configuration form, or a separate form will open for the object.
4. To undock a form from the main configuration form, click on the tab header and choose Undock. The tab disappears and the form is displayed as a standard 5620 SAM
form, separate from other tabs and the main configuration form.

Procedure 312 To modify multiple objects at one time (multiedit)
The 5620 SAM provides a multiedit function that allows you to select multiple objects at one time for editing of specific properties. The objects must be of the same type.
Changes for the selected objects are entered on a Multiple Instances (Edit) property form. When the objects selected for multiedit are configured with differing parameter values,
the 5620 SAM typically alerts you by displaying multivalue fields or dropdowns for the parameters whose values differ. Multivalue fields and dropdowns are identified by triple
borders along the top and right side; see Figure 310. Both configurable and readonly parameters may display as multivalue properties.
You can modify configurable multivalue fields. When a value is entered in a multivalue field, the value is propagated to all selected objects in the multiedit group, and the
parameter no longer displays as a multivalue property.
Note Selecting large numbers of objects for multiedit may affect system performance.
The 5620 SAM also provides a bulk operations function; see chapter 21.
Figure 310 Multivalue property form

1. Select multiple objects in the navigation tree or a list, then rightclick and choose Properties. The object type Multiple Instances (Edit) form opens.
2. Configure the required parameters.
When a multivalue field is changed to empty and the change is applied, and that field was previously populated with a value for one of the selected multiedit objects, a
warning message is displayed. The warning message indicates the tab and parameter affected.
3. Save your changes and close the form.

Procedure 313 To use the 5620 SAM clipboard
You can use the 5620 SAM clipboard to copy property form identifiers for the following:
property forms
statistics forms
objects in list forms
objects in the navigation tree
alarms in the alarm list
alarm Info forms
problems encountered notifications
A property form identifier is a unique internal address that the 5620 SAM assigns to a form. Property form identifiers are copied to the clipboard using the Clipboard icon or by
selecting the Copy to Clipboard option from a contextual menu.
You can use the 5620 SAM clipboard to open forms, send identifiers to other users or applications, configure search filters, and search for objects or create physical links on the
topology map.
When you copy items from a list or from the navigation tree, you can copy multiple items at one time. For other 5620 SAM clipboard functions, only one item at a time is copied.
Each time a property form identifier is copied to the clipboard, the previous clipboard contents are replaced. For example, if you copy a navigation tree object, then copy an alarm,
the navigation tree object is no longer available.
1. To copy property form identifiers to the 5620 SAM clipboard, perform one of the following:
a. Copy objects from a list.
You can use the 5620 SAM clipboard for objects in list forms, the alarm list, statistics lists, and the Problems Encountered form.
i. Select one or more items in the list.
ii. Click Copy to Clipboard.
To copy alarms from the list in the alarm window, you can also use the contextual menu.
b. Copy objects from the navigation tree.
i. Expand the tree as required.
ii. Select one or more objects from the tree. The Copy to Clipboard icon is activated.
Objects with no properties do not activate the Copy to Clipboard icon (for example, the Fans parent object). If multiple selected objects include an object
without properties, the Copy to Clipboard icon is not activated.
iii. Click on the Copy to Clipboard icon.
Alternatively, you can use the contextual menu for single objects or multiple objects that are at the same level in the tree.
c. Copy a property form identifier from a form.
i. Open the required form.
ii. Rightclick on the title bar for the form and choose Copy Property Form Identifier.
Alternatively, you can choose Application Copy Property Form Identifier from the 5620 SAM main menu.
d. Copy a property form identifier from a tab.
i. Open the required tab.
ii. Rightclick on the tab and choose Copy Property Form Identifier. The property form identifier link is copied to the clipboard.
Alternatively, you can choose Application Copy Property Form Identifier from the 5620 SAM main menu.
2. To open a property form from the clipboard, perform one of the following:
a. Use the Go To Property Form menu item.
i. Choose Application Go To Property Form from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Go To Property Form window opens.
ii. Click Paste. The clipboard contents appear in the Identifier field.
The most recent information copied to the system clipboard is pasted, even if it is not a property form identifier. If you use the system clipboard to copy text
or other types of information after you copy a property form identifier, the identifier is no longer available.
If the clipboard contains multiple objects, only the first object is pasted.
You can use this method to open a specific tab, if a tab was used to save the property form identifier.
iii. Click OK or Apply. The properties form for the object opens.
b. Use the Clipboard window.
i. Choose Application Clipboard from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Clipboard window opens.
ii. Select an object and click View Object. The properties form for the object opens.
Use this method to open the property form for an NE. To open a specific tab, use the method described in step 2 a.
The clipboard window shows the most recent property form identifiers copied to the 5620 SAM clipboard. Property form identifiers are preserved in the
clipboard window even when the system clipboard is subsequently used for other types of information. However, they are replaced when new property form
identifiers are copied to the 5620 SAM clipboard.
3. To send the clipboard contents to other users on the 5620 SAM server, see Procedure 39. You can also paste the clipboard contents into another application.
4. To use the clipboard for configuring advanced search filters, see Procedure 324.
5. To use the clipboard to search for objects on the topology map, see Procedure 623; to create physical links, see Procedure 634.
6. To use the clipboard for alarms, see Procedure 3826.

Procedure 314 To monitor the 5620 SAM Task Manager
The Task Manager allows you to monitor the progress of operational tasks performed by the 5620 SAM. Tasks are displayed in a list form; you can select a list item to view
information about a specific task.
The 5620 SAM displays the following in the Task Manager list:
all write operations that are performed from the 5620 SAM GUI; for example, when you click on the Apply or OK buttons
all write operations that are performed using the OSSI
some read operations; for example, when you click on the Resync or Collect All buttons
A 5620 SAM administrator can configure task monitoring and display parameters; see “To change the 5620 SAM Task Manager settings” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator
Guide.
You can send the tasks displayed in the Task Manager to a file using the OSSI findToFile method. See “Inventory retrieval methods” in the 5620 SAM XML OSS Interface
Developer Guide for more information.
1. Choose Application Task Manager from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Task Manager form opens.
The All Users check box appears for 5620 SAM administrators. If you are a 5620 SAM administrator or a user with an assigned administrator scope of command role, go
to step 2. Otherwise, go to step 3.
2. Select the All Users check box to monitor operations that are performed by all users in the 5620 SAM server.
3. Doubleclick on a task. The property form for the task opens.
Note The Task Manager automatically refreshes when the value of the autoRefreshInterval parameter is reached. The default is 20. You can also click
Search to refresh the list of tasks.
4. Click on the tabs to view information about the task.
5. To view the 5620 SAM GUI or OSS user activity associated with a task, click User Activity. The Activity form opens and displays additional information about the task.
See “User activity logging” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide for more information.
6. Close the forms.

Procedure 315 To save listed information to a file
You can save listed information to a file, for purposes such as:
record keeping
inventory management
processing by another application
Perform this procedure to save listed information from a list form or the alarm window.
For information about display preferences for lists, see Procedure 322. For information about the alarm window, see chapter 38.
1. Open a list form and apply a filter or click Search to produce a list.
2. Rightclick on any column heading and choose Save To File from the contextual menu. The Save As form opens.
Note The 5620 SAM uses the user home directory as the default location for saved files.
3. Specify the name and location of a file for the listed information. You can save the information in the following file types:
All Files
HTML
CSV
You can specify the default file type on the User Preferences form; see Procedure 316.
4. Click Save. The information is saved and the Save As form closes.

3.5 5620 SAM GUI user preferences configuration procedures
The following procedures describe how to configure user preferences for the 5620 SAM GUI.

Procedure 316 To configure 5620 SAM user preferences
The 5620 SAM GUI allows you to configure workspace elements and functions to suit your operational requirements. You can set many preferences using the User Preferences
form accessed from the 5620 SAM main menu. You can also configure custom workspaces; see chapter 4. You can set tab preferences to show or hide tabs on forms; see
Procedure 317.
The User Preferences form allows you to set preferences for the following GUI functions:
show or hide the toolbar
set the default time zone
suppress or allow warnings and messages
set defaults for list forms
configure the workspace selector
You can also use the User Preferences form to set preferences for:
alarm and topology windows
STM forms
statistics plotters; see the 5620 SAM Statistics Management Guide
scripts; see the 5620 SAM Scripts and Templates Developer Guide
service encapsulation dot1q values
browser path
You can import local tab preferences from a file using the User Preferences form; see Procedure 320.
User preferences are specific to a particular user; the settings are associated with the user ID and are applied to the system when that user is logged in.
1. Choose Application User Preferences from the 5620 SAM main menu. The User Preferences form opens.
2. Click on the tabs and configure the required parameters. Table 33 describes user preferences parameters.
The Workspaces tab allows you to configure the workspace selector; see Procedure 410.
Table 33 User preferences parameters
Parameter Description See

Access Interface Specifies whether the AutoAssign ID parameter is enabled by default for dot1q encapsulation —
Encap Value
(Dot1q only)

Apply User Span Specifies when enabled that the navigation tree, maps, list forms and the alarm list display only the objects "Span of control"
Of Control in the Edit Access span of control of the user in this chapter

Procedure 332

Browser Path Specifies the file path to the browser application that the 5620 SAM launches as a web portal. You can —
configure the parameter manually or by clicking the Browse button and navigating to the file path.

Command Helper Allows you to designate the key that activates the command helper function in the Script Editor 5620 SAM
Key Scripts and
Templates
Developer Guide

Debug STM Mode Specifies whether the 5620 SAM provides additional options in the object dropdown menu for the Service Procedure 875
Test Manager. The options allow you to configure some limits and view additional information for tests.

Default Client Time Specifies the default time zone used by the 5620 SAM client. Choose a time zone from the dropdown Procedure 321
Zone menu. The 5620 SAM server provides a menu default.

You can modify the current client time zone without changing the default client time zone.

Default Polling Specifies the default polling interval for realtime statistics in the Statistics Plotter form. The range is 10 to 5620 SAM
Interval (seconds) 3600. Statistics
Management
Guide

Enable Command Specifies whether the Command Helper function in the Script Editor is enabled.The Command Helper is a 5620 SAM
Helper onekey function that completes commonly occurring script commands. You can designate the command Scripts and
helper key. Templates
Developer Guide

Enable Specifies whether confirmation messages are displayed before the 5620 SAM carries out a bulk change Section 21.1
Confirmation for operation
Bulk Change
Actions

GUI Builder in the Specifies whether the Velocity GUI Builder in the Script Editor is enabled 5620 SAM
Editor Scripts and
Templates
Developer Guide

Maximum Data Specifies the number of seconds to keep statistics data in the Statistics Plotter. The range is 3600 to 5620 SAM
Retention Time 86400. The default is 43200. Statistics
(seconds) Management
Guide

Overlay Type Specifies the default type of overlay in topology maps —

Save To File Specifies the default file type when list information is saved to a file Procedure 315
Default Extension

Show Alarm Flags Specifies whether the alarm window displays alarm flags on the Alarm Table tab Procedure 3810

Show Correlated Specifies whether the Show Correlated Alarms parameter in the alarm window is enabled by default Procedure 3811
Alarms by Default

Show Toolbar Specifies whether the 5620 SAM toolbar is displayed in the main GUI window "Toolbar" in this
chapter

Show “View Specifies whether the property form for an alarmed object displays a builtin navigation tree when the View Procedure 3812
Alarmed Object” Alarmed Object button or contextual menu item is clicked. When the parameter is enabled, the alarmed
with navigation object is highlighted in the builtin tree. Only equipment objects below the shelf level are affected.

Specify # of Items Specifies the maximum number of items displayed per page on a list form. The range is 1 to 9999. Procedure 322
Per Page

Suppress Specifies whether warnings are displayed when saving changes to child object forms that are launched "Warning and
Containing Window from parent object forms confirmation
Warning messages" in
this chapter

Suppress Template Specifies whether warning messages are suppressed when you execute a template 5620 SAM
Execution Warning Scripts and
Templates
Developer Guide

Suppress Template Specifies whether template generation messages are suppressed 5620 SAM
Generation Scripts and
Message Templates
Developer Guide

Suppress Service Specifies whether load time warnings for service and composite service maps are suppressed —
and Composite
Service Map Load
Warning

Turn on Audible Specifies whether an audible alarm sounds when an incoming alarm is registered Procedure 389
Alarms


Procedure 317 To set local tab preferences for configuration forms
Some 5620 SAM property forms contain numerous tabs, which you can display, hide, and arrange in a preferred sequence according to your operational requirements.
An administrator can configure 5620 SAM system preferences to enable or disable tab preferences and to define the default local behavior for hidden tabs. See “System
preferences configuration procedures” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide.
Custom workspaces are configured to use either local tab preferences or custom tab preferences. Local tab preferences are configured for the current user. Custom tab
preferences are set as defaults in the custom workspace. See Procedure 44.
When the current workspace uses local tab preferences, you can set and save tab preferences using the tab selector. When the current workspace uses custom tab preferences,
you cannot set tab preferences using the tab selector.
You can export local tab preferences by saving them to a file; see Procedure 319. You can import local tab preferences from a file; see Procedure 320.
1. Open the property form for an object.
2. Click on the tab selector button at the right of the row of tabs. The tab selector dropdown opens.
Note 1 The keyboard shortcut to display the tab selector dropdown is CTRLT. The keyboard focus must be on one of the main tabs of the form. Press
the Tab key to transfer the keyboard focus to the dropdown, then use the downarrow key.
Note 2 If the Tab Preferences parameter for the current workspace is set to Custom, the buttons on the tab selector do not appear.
3. Perform any of the following:
a. To display a hidden tab, select a tab name in the Hidden Tabs list and click the Move to Displayed Tabs button.
b. To hide a displayed tab, select a tab name in the Displayed Tabs Order list and click the Move to Hidden Tabs button.
c. To reorder the sequence of tabs, select a tab name in the Displayed Tabs Order list and click the Move Up or Move Down button. You can select and move multiple
tabs.
Note 1 Tab settings are specific to the selected object type. For example, if you open the Network Element (Edit) form for a 7705 SARH and hide all tabs
except the General tab, then open the same form for a 9500 MPR, the form displays the General tab and may also display some 9500 MPR specific tabs.
Note 2 At least one tab must be displayed on a form. If all tabs are moved to the Hidden Tabs list, the Save Tab Settings button is dimmed.
Note 3 Mandatory tabs (such as the TCA, Faults, and Deployment tabs) do not appear in the tab selector.
4. To save the changes, click on the Save Tab Settings button. The form updates with the configured tab display.
Note 1 If you close the tab selector without saving, all unsaved tab preferences are lost.
Note 2 The Find Attribute form lists all parameters on the form including parameters located on hidden tabs. When you click on the Show on Form button,
the tab is temporarily displayed.

Procedure 318 To temporarily display hidden tabs on property forms
You can temporarily display the hidden tabs on a property form. Hidden tabs that are temporarily displayed are hidden again the next time the form is opened.
1. Open the property form for an object.
2. Perform one of the following:
a. To temporarily display all hidden tabs on a form, click on the Show All Tabs button at the right side of the row of tabs. The form displays all available tabs.
If no available tabs are currently hidden, the Show All Tabs button is dimmed.
Note The keyboard shortcut to temporarily display all hidden tabs is CTRLShiftA. The keyboard focus must be on one of the main tabs for the
form.
b. To temporarily display one hidden tab, perform the following:
i. Click on the tab selector button at the right of the row of tabs. The tab selector dropdown opens.
Note The keyboard shortcut to display the tab selector dropdown is CTRLT. The keyboard focus must be on one of the main tabs for the
form. Press the Tab key to transfer the keyboard focus to the dropdown, then use the downarrow key.
ii. Doubleclick on a tab in the Hidden Tabs list. The form displays the chosen tab.
Hidden tabs that are displayed temporarily are shown in italics in the Displayed Tabs Order list in the tab selector dropdown.
If the Tab Preferences parameter for the current workspace is set to Local, you can click on the Save Tab Settings button to set all temporarily displayed tabs as saved
tab preferences. If the Tab Preferences parameter for the current workspace is set to Custom, the buttons on the tab selector do not appear.

Procedure 319 To export local tab preferences
You can export local tab preferences and import them into a 5620 SAM client of a different user.
2. Click on the Tab Preferences dropdown and choose Export. The Export Directory window opens.
3. Specify the export directory in the Save In dropdown menu, or create a directory or folder.
4. Click Save. The local tab preferences are exported and saved to the specified directory.
5. Close the User Preferences form.

Procedure 320 To import local tab preferences
2. Click on the Tab Preferences dropdown and choose Import. The Import Directory window opens.
3. Use the Look In dropdown menu to navigate to the required directory.
Note The folder that contains the tab preferences must contain tab preferences of only one user. If there are multiple tab preferences of different users in
the specified directory, an error message appears.
4. Click Open. A warning message is displayed.
5. Click Yes to overwrite your local tab preferences with the tab preferences from the selected directory.
All affected users that currently have a client session open, other than the client session where the import has been initiated, will receive a systemgenerated text
message informing them that their tab preferences have been changed and they should restart their 5620 SAM client or risk losing the changes.
The user can click on the Reply button to reply to the message.
6. Close the User Preferences form.

Procedure 321 To configure the current client time zone
The default time zone used by the 5620 SAM client is configured in user preferences; see Procedure 316. You can choose a time zone other than the default.
Perform this procedure to change the time zone used by the 5620 SAM client.
1. Click on the Current Client Time Zone icon in the bottom right corner of the GUI. The Current Client Time Zone form opens.
a. Select Use Default Client Time Zone.
b. Select Use Specific Client Time Zone and choose a time zone from the list.

Procedure 322 To manage the display of listed information
Lists often contain numerous columns and items. The 5620 SAM allows you to manage the display of listed information to suit your operational requirements. You can resize and
rearrange the sequence of columns, and remove columns that are not required. You can sort lists based on a selected column (attribute), and choose to display objects in
ascending or descending order.
Table 34 describes the order in which different types of data are sorted from the top of the column to the bottom, based on the direction of the arrow in the column header.
Table 34 Sorting listed information
Entry type Down arrow (Descending) Up arrow (Ascending)

Numbers only Sorted from the lowest number to the highest number Sorted from the highest number to the lowest number

Letters Sorted left to right, character by character, in alphabetical order Sorted left to right, character by character, in reverse alphabetical
order

Alphanumeric Sorted left to right, character by character, in the following order: Sorted left to right, character by character, in the following order: in
from 0 to 9, then in alphabetical order reverse alphabetical order, then from 9 to 0

Alphanumeric Addresses are sorted first by type, then alphanumerically from the Addresses are sorted first by type, then alphanumerically from the
for IP Address lowest to the highest number. For example, IPv4, IPv6 and DNS, highest to the lowest number. For example, DNS address, IPv6,
fields(1) in the following order: IPv4 in the following order:
2.1.1.1 24AA:C8:0:0:0:0:0:EA
10.2.2.2 14:C8AA:0:0:0:0:0:EA
21.2.1.1 21.10.1.1
21.10.1.1 21.2.1.1
14:C8AA:0:0:0:0:0:EA 10.2.2.2
24AA:C8:0:0:0:0:0:EA 2.1.1.1

Special Sorted left to right, character by character. Sorted left to right, character by character.
characters The following characters are sorted in the following order before The following characters are sorted in the following order before
numbers, and uppercase and lowercase letters in a list: (space) ! # numbers, and uppercase and lowercase letters in a list: ~ } | {
$ % & ‘ ( ) * + , . / The following characters are sorted in the following order before
The following characters are sorted in the following order after numbers in a list, but after uppercase and lowercase letters: @ ? > =
numbers in a list, but before uppercase and lowercase letters: : ; < < ; :
= > ? @ The following characters are sorted in the following order after
The following characters are sorted in the following order after numbers, and uppercase and lowercase letters in a list: / . , + * ) ( ‘ &
numbers, and uppercase and lowercase letters in a list: { | } ~ % $ # ! (space)

Blanks Blank entries are placed first at the top of the list. Blank entries are placed last at the bottom of the list.

Note
1. Sorting on an IP Address field may cause performance issues when the 5620 SAM database is under heavy load.
You can save your display configuration so that subsequent searches on the same object type are displayed according to your preferences.
You can save listed information to a file; see Procedure 315. For more information about lists and list forms, see "List forms" in this chapter. Figure 311 describes the features of
a list form.
Figure 311 List elements


Perform this procedure to configure and save display preferences for list forms and the dynamic alarm list.
1. Open a list form and choose an object type from the object type dropdown menu. The columns specific to the object type are displayed.
2. Configure column display preferences. Perform any of the following:
a. Remove columns.
i. Rightclick on any column heading and choose Column Display. The Column Display form opens.
ii. In the Displayed on Table panel, select one or more columns to remove.
iii. Click on the left arrow to move the selected items to the Available for Table panel.
Dimmed items cannot be moved.
There must be at least one item in the Displayed on Table panel.
iv. Save your changes and close the form.
b. Add columns.
ii. In the Available for Table panel, select one or more columns to add.
iii. Click on the right arrow to move the selected items to the Displayed on Table panel.
c. Rearrange the lefttoright sequence of columns.
Use this feature to place important information in the first few columns of the table, or to place related columns side by side.
ii. In the Displayed on Table panel, select the name of one or more columns to rearrange.
iii. Click on the up or down arrows to move the selected items. The toptobottom sequence of the items reflects the lefttoright sequence of the columns in the
list table.
Alternatively, you can change the sequence of columns by clicking and dragging on a column heading.
d. Resize columns. Hover over the vertical line between two columns, then click and drag when the arrows appear.
3. Configure a filter if required and click Search to generate a list.
You can specify a user preference for the number of items to display on a page; see Procedure 316.
When a list uses multiple pages, the paging controls are available. You can enter a page number to jump to a specific page. The page number and total page count are
shown on the form.
The total number of listed items is indicated by the Count value. The Count value is also displayed in the contextual menu for column headings.
To hide the simple search fields in the column headings, click on the Show/Hide Filter button.
4. Configure sorting preferences.
Lists are sorted toptobottom based on selected column attributes. You can display sorted results in ascending or descending order; see Table 34. When no column is
explicitly selected for sorting, the first column at the left of the table is used.
Perform one of the following:
a. Sort a list using a single column.
i. Click on the column heading. The list is sorted based on the values for the selected attribute.
ii. Click on the column heading to reverse the sorting direction (ascending or descending).
b. Sort using multiple columns.
When a sort using a single column produces many items that all have the same value for the selected attribute, you can refine the sort by choosing additional
columns. The priority order for the columns is indicated by a number in parentheses in the column heading.
i. Rightclick on any column heading and choose Show Sorting. The Show Sorting form opens.
ii. In the Used for Sorting panel, select any column names that are not required for sorting and click on the left arrow to move the selected items.
iii. In the Available for Sorting panel, select the column names to be used for sorting and click on the right arrow. The selected items appear in the Used for
Sorting panel.
iv. In the Used for Sorting panel, click on the items and use the up and down arrows to arrange them in the required priority order.
The sorting priority decreases from top to bottom; the item at the top of the panel has priority (1).
v. Click to select Sort Ascending or Sort Descending; see Table 34. The selected column headings display numbers in parentheses to show the sorting
priority.
vi. Close the form.
Alternatively, you can click on a column heading to select the priority (1) attribute, then CTRLclick on additional column headings to further refine the sort. Priority
is based on the order in which the columns are clicked. Press CTRLclick on an already selected (numbered) column heading to reverse the sorting direction
(ascending or descending).
You can navigate quickly through a long sorted list using the first character of the column that has sorting priority (1). Click in the list, then type a letter or number.
The first item that begins with that letter or number in the priority (1) column is selected in the list.
5. Save your column display and sorting preferences.
i. Rightclick on any column heading and choose Save Table Preferences.
ii. Confirm the action. The configured display preferences are applied whenever you open a list table for the same object type.

3.6 5620 SAM searches
The 5620 SAM typically manages large numbers of network objects, alarms, policies, and configurations, as well as large amounts of information. Searches allow you to find the
objects and information required for your operations. Searches are available for list forms, alarms, navigation tree objects, topology map objects, configuration parameters, and
online documentation.
This section provides an overview of 5620 SAM search features. See Section 3.7 for search procedures.
The 5620 SAM GUI provides several types of searches. Table 35 describes the types of searches available.
Table 35 5620 SAM search types
Search type Description See

Find attribute Locate a tab, panel, or parameter on a form using the Find icon Procedure 329

Simple search Search lists using column headings to create filters "Simple searches" in this section
Procedure 323

Advanced search Search lists using the filter configuration form "Advanced searches" in this section
Procedure 324

Endpoint search Search for LSPs, tunnels, and paths by specifying endpoints Procedure 325

Equipment Group filters Search for alarms, equipment objects, and service objects, Procedures 333 and 334
based on equipment groups

alarm window Search for alarms in the alarm window using a simple, Chapter 38
advanced, or historical alarms search

Navigation tree Search for network objects in the navigation tree using the Find Procedure 51
icon or Find field

Topology map Search for map objects using the Find icon or Search field Procedure 623

Help system: User index Search the 5620 SAM user documentation “Using the Help System” under Help User Documentation in
search the 5620 SAM main menu.

Help system: Parameter Search for information about configuration forms and Procedure 330
Search Tool parameters

Search filters
Some search types use configurable search filters. Filter configuration varies depending on the type of search; see Table 35.
Search filters for lists in the 5620 SAM typically consist of one or more filter properties that are based on the type of objects in the list. A filter property is a combination of an
attribute, a function, and a value:
Attribute: defines the information type, or field, to be searched. Attributes typically correspond to the properties and parameters for objects in the list. For example, you
could filter a list of services by using the Customer attribute to search for services associated with a particular customer. Attributes are specific to the object type being
searched.
Function: defines the operation that the search performs. For example, the CONTAINS function will search in the list for instances where the attribute contains a specified
value, such as a number or text string. The available functions vary, depending on the selected attribute. See Table 36 for information about search functions.
Value: specifies the character string or parameter setting used by the function. The available values depend on the selected attribute. For example, if the Customer ID
attribute is selected, you can configure numerals in the Value field. If the Current OLC State attribute is selected, you can choose In Service or Maintenance from the
dropdown menu for the Value field.
You can configure filter properties using the column headings of a list; see "Simple searches" in this section. You can open the filter configuration form to display, create, and
modify filter properties. The filter configuration form is used for advanced searches; see "Advanced searches" in this section. Figure 312 shows the filter configuration form.
You can save search filters for reuse or modification; see Procedure 326. Saved filters appear in the filter list dropdown menu for the list form; see Figure 32.
When a saved search filter contains attributes or values that are not available for the object type you are searching, the 5620 SAM alerts you by displaying red text. See "Invalid
attributes or values" in this section for more information.
If the number of search results exceeds the allowed limit, the 5620 SAM displays a dialog box that indicates the number of results returned. You can modify a filter to refine the
search criteria and reduce the search results.
On some list forms, you can enable a span of control filter to display only the objects that are within your Edit span of control; see Procedure 332.
Table 36 Search functions
Operator Description

APPROXIMATELY Filters by object timestamp. The function allows you to specify a timestamp value using 1 min resolution rather than the 1 ms default
EQUAL resolution. The search returns items that match the specified timestamp value.
Select a time unit in the display (yyyy/mm/dd/hh:mm) and click on the arrows in the column heading to specify a time value.

BETWEEN Filters by object timestamp. The function allows you to specify a start time and end time. The search returns items that have a
timestamp between the configured values.
Click on the Select icon, select a time unit in the display (yyyy/mm/dd/hh:mm), and click on the arrows in the column heading to
specify a time value for Start Time and End Time.
If the start and end time are the same, the OK button is dimmed.

CONTAINS Filters by comparing character strings. The search returns an item when the search term matches any part of the character string of
the item. For example, the filter property “Description CONTAINS (ab)” returns all items with the string “ab” in the Description attribute,
such as “ABC Industries” and “Calgary, AB”. An empty CONTAINS search returns all items.
The function is not casesensitive.

DOES NOT Filters by comparing character strings. The search returns an item when the search term does not match any part of the character
CONTAIN string of the item. For example, the filter property “Description DOES NOT CONTAIN (ab)” returns items that do not contain the string
“ab” in the Description attribute. Items with Descriptions such as “ABC Industries” and “Calgary, AB” are not returned in the search
results.
The function is not casesensitive.

EQUALS The search returns an item when the search term exactly matches the attribute value of the item.
The function is casesensitive.

GREATER OR Filters by comparing numerical values.The search returns items that have a value greater than or equal to the search term.
EQUAL

GREATER THAN Filters by comparing numerical values.The search returns items that have a value greater than the search term.

IS BLANK The search returns items that do not have a value. For example, the filter property “Associated Template IS BLANK” returns services
that have no configured value in the Associated Template field.
When the IS BLANK function is selected, you cannot configure a value for the filter property.

IN THE PAST Filters by object timestamp. The function allows you to enter a period of time. The search returns items that are within the specified
period of time before the present; for example, in the past two hours.
Click on the Select icon in the column heading and enter a period of time.

LESS OR EQUAL Filters by comparing numerical values.The search returns items that have a value less than or equal to the search term.

LESS THAN Filters by comparing numerical values.The search returns items that have a value less than the search term.

MATCHES Applies to simple searches using column headings, for a single property of a group of checkboxes.
The MATCHES function filters by comparing checkbox settings. The search returns an item when the checkbox setting (selected or
deselected) of the search term matches the checkbox setting of the item.

MATCHES ALL Applies to advanced searches using the filter configuration form, for attributes that show settings for a group of checkboxes.
When you choose the MATCHES ALL function, you must click Properties in the Value field and select or deselect the checkboxes
associated with the attribute.
The MATCHES ALL function filters by comparing checkbox settings. The search returns an item when all of the selected checkbox
settings of the search term are selected for the item.

MATCHES ANY Applies to advanced searches using the filter configuration form, for attributes that show settings for a group of checkboxes.
When you choose the MATCHES ANY function, you must click Properties in the Value field and select or deselect the checkboxes
associated with the attribute.
The MATCHES ANY function filters by comparing checkbox settings. The search returns an item when one or more of the selected
checkboxes of the search term matches the corresponding checkbox of the item.

NOT EQUAL The search returns an item when the search term does not exactly match the attribute value of the item.

WILDCARD For filters based on character strings (letters, numbers, or special characters). Wildcards substitute for characters in the search term.
Use a question mark (?) to substitute for a single character. Use a single asterisk (*) to substitute for multiple characters.

Simple searches
You can perform a simple search on a list form using the column headings of the list table. Each column heading displays an attribute. You can configure a filter property for an
attribute by selecting a function and a value from the column heading fields.
Filter properties for simple searches are displayed in the column heading, and show the attribute, the function (as a symbol, such as = or >), and the configured value. See Figure
32. You can configure multiple filter properties at one time.
See Procedure 323 for more information about simple searches.

Advanced searches
You can perform an advanced search on a list using the filter configuration form. Figure 312 shows the filter configuration form. With an advanced search, you can apply more
than one function and value to a single attribute. For example, you could configure a filter property Customer ID GREATER THAN (1) and also, in the same filter, the property
Customer ID LESS THAN (100). This is not possible with a simple search.
Figure 312 Filter configuration form

An advanced search filter combines filter properties using Boolean operators. You can group properties together using brackets, and apply Boolean operators to the groups. See
Table 37 for information about Boolean operators.
You can use the filter configuration form to modify simple searches. See Procedure 324 for more information about advanced searches and the filter configuration form.

Invalid attributes or values
When a saved search filter contains attributes or values that are not available for the object type you are searching, the 5620 SAM alerts you by displaying red text. The filter
name is displayed in red text in the saved filters dropdown of a list form. The invalid attributes or values are displayed in red text on the filter configuration form.
You can select filters with invalid attributes or values and use them to perform a search. However, the invalid attributes are not evaluated. You can also display and modify such
filters using the filter configuration form. For information about using the filter configuration form, see Procedure 324.
When a filter property that contains an invalid attribute is displayed on the filter configuration form, the attribute, function, and value for that property are all shown in red text. The
attribute is surrounded by asterisks (**). Both the attribute and value are displayed as a besteffort string and may not support language localization.
When you select an invalid attribute in the filter display field, it is displayed in the Attribute dropdown as a besteffort string that may not support language localization. If the
attribute is not recognized, the Function dropdown and the Value field display only the configurations that are shown in the Filter display field. They cannot be changed until a
different attribute is chosen from the Attribute dropdown menu.
When only the value in a filter property is invalid, the value is displayed in red text. The value is surrounded by asterisks (**) and may not support language localization. The
Value dropdown does not display a value, but is configurable.
As long as invalid attributes or values exist, the Save button on the filter configuration form is dimmed.

Equipment group filters
Equipment group filters allow you to search for objects that are organized by equipment group, such as new alarms, historical alarms, managed equipment objects, and managed
service objects. An equipment group is sometimes called a topology group. See Procedure 628 for information about how to create an equipment group.
An equipment group filter is created by selecting from existing equipment groups. Filters can be saved for reuse or modification. See Procedures 333 and 334 for more
information about equipment group filters.

Managing search results and lists
Most list forms allow you to manage the display of search results. You can:
specify the number of items per page and navigate through pages
remove, resize, and rearrange columns
sort lists based on a selected column in ascending or descending order
save your display preferences
See Procedure 322 for more information about managing the display of lists.
You can save listed information to a file; see Procedure 315.

3.7 5620 SAM search procedures
The following procedures describe how to configure and manage filters and search for information in the 5620 SAM.

Procedure 323 To perform a simple search from an object list form
You can perform a simple search using the column headings of a list table. Each column heading displays an attribute. You can configure a filter property for each attribute by
selecting a function and a value from the column heading fields. See Figure 32. The available functions and values vary depending on the selected attribute and other settings.
You can configure one function and value for each attribute.
You can show or hide the column heading search fields. You can also display a simple search filter on the filter configuration form, then save or modify it using the advanced
search functions; see Procedure 324. When multiple filter properties are configured using column headings, the properties are combined using the AND Boolean operator.
Simple searches are disabled when:
the filter configuration form is open
a saved filter is selected in the saved filter dropdown
a saved filter is loaded using the Saved Filters form
See "5620 SAM searches" in this chapter for more information.
1. Open a list form and choose an object type from the object type dropdown, if required.
You can reduce the number of items in the object dropdown menu. See Procedures 331 and 49.
2. Choose No Filter from the saved filter dropdown menu, if required.
3. Click on the Show/Hide Filter button to show the column heading search fields, if required.
4. Configure one or more filter properties.
i. Decide on an attribute for your filter and locate the corresponding column heading in the list.
When a column heading has no search fields, the attribute in that column is not searchable.
ii. Click on the function field in the column heading and choose a function from the dropdown menu. The symbol for the function is displayed. See Table 36 for a
description of search functions.
iii. Click on the value field and enter a value or choose one from the list. The value is displayed.
If you enter a value without choosing a function first, a default function is used.
5. Configure the Span On parameter to override the global span of control preference, if required. See Procedure 332.
6. Click Search. A list of filtered results is displayed.
The Search button applies the filter even if the column heading search fields are hidden.
7. Revise the filter properties, if required.
To clear a filter property, choose (NONE) from the function dropdown menu for that attribute. The filter property is cleared from the column heading.
To clear all filter properties, click on the Clear All Filters icon. All column headings return to an unconfigured state.

Procedure 324 To perform an advanced search from an object list form
You can use the filter configuration form to perform an advanced search on a list. Figure 312 shows the filter configuration form. Advanced search filters are more detailed than
simple search filters. See Procedure 323 for information about configuring a simple search filter.
Multiple filter properties in an advanced search filter are combined using Boolean operators. You can apply brackets to properties or groups of properties, and apply Boolean
operators to the groups. Table 37 describes Boolean search operators.
Table 37 Boolean search operators
Boolean operator Description

AND When you combine properties using the AND operator, the search returns objects that meet both or all of the specified criteria.

OR When you combine properties using the OR operator, the search returns objects that meet at least one of the specified criteria.

NOT When a filter property is preceded by the NOT operator, items that meet the criteria in that filter property are excluded from the results.

You can save search filters for reuse or modification; see Procedure 326.
For more information, see "5620 SAM searches" in this chapter.
1. Open a list form and choose an object type from the object type dropdown menu.
You can reduce the number of items in the object dropdown menu; see Procedures 331 and 49.
2. Click on the Filter icon. The filter configuration form opens.
3. Configure a filter property.
You can load a previously saved filter and modify it; see Procedure 327.
i. Click on the Attribute field and choose an attribute from the dropdown menu.
ii. Click on the Function field and choose a function from the dropdown menu. See Table 36 for a description of search functions.
iii. Click on the Value field and choose a value, or enter a value manually.
Alternatively, you can use the 5620 SAM clipboard to enter a value. Copy the property form identifier for a form that contains the same attribute and value that you
are searching, then click on the Paste Attribute from Clipboard icon. The value field is populated with the required value. This method is useful when the value you
are entering is a long text string, or when your search uses a value (such as a customer name) that you know is on a particular form. See Procedure 313 for more
information about using the clipboard.
The Paste Attribute from Clipboard icon is available when a search attribute is selected in step i. A value is pasted only when the clipboard contains an attribute of
the same name and type as the search attribute. If the clipboard contains multiple objects, the value for the first object is pasted.
iv. Click Add. The filter property appears in the Filter display field and the Operators dropdown is available.
4. If required, change the Boolean operator. Click on the Operators dropdown and select an operator. See Table 37 for information about Boolean operators.
The Boolean operator shown in the Operators field is inserted between the filter properties when the next filter property is added.
The Operators dropdown is available only when a filter property is displayed in the Filter display field.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to configure additional filter properties.
6. Choose a Span setting from the Span dropdown menu; see Procedure 332 and "Span of control" in this chapter.
7. To modify filter properties, perform any of the following:
a. Add or remove brackets.
i. Click and drag to select a filter property or properties in the Filter display field.
ii. Click on the Brackets button. The selected properties are wrapped in brackets. When properties are already wrapped in brackets, the Brackets button
unwraps the selected properties.
You can wrap or unwrap multiple properties only when all Boolean operators within the brackets are the same.
b. Replace a filter property.
i. Click and drag to select a filter property in the Filter display field.
ii. Configure an attribute, function, and value; see step 3.
iii. Click Replace. The configured filter property replaces the selected filter property.
c. Exclude filter properties.
i. Click and drag to select a filter property in the Filter display field.
ii. Click on the NOT button. The property is wrapped in brackets and preceded by the NOT operator. Objects that match the selected property are excluded
from the results.
You can exclude multiple properties at one time.
You can select excluded properties and click on the NOT button to include the properties again.
d. Replace a Boolean operator.
i. Click to select a Boolean operator in the Filter display field.
ii. Choose a Boolean operator from the Operators dropdown menu. The new selection replaces the previous operator.
When you replace a Boolean operator, the properties associated with that operator are wrapped in brackets.
You can replace all of the Boolean operators in a bracketed group by selecting the group and choosing a Boolean operator from the Operators dropdown
menu.
e. Delete filter properties.
i. Click and drag to select one or more filter properties in the Filter display field.
ii. Click Delete. The selected properties are deleted from the filter.
To delete all properties from the Filter display field, click Clear.
8. Click Apply to perform the search. The filtered results are displayed.
9. To save the configured filter, see Procedure 326. Otherwise, close the filter configuration form.
10. Select the required object in the list.

Procedure 325 To perform a search by specifying endpoints
Perform this procedure to find objects such as service tunnels, MPLS paths, VLAN paths, and LSP paths by specifying endpoints. You can search based on a source site
endpoint, a destination site endpoint, or both. You can also search based on multiple source or destination endpoints at the same time.
1. Choose one of the following menu options from the 5620 SAM main menu:
Manage MPLS Dynamic LSPs
Manage MPLS Manual Bypass LSPs
Manage MPLS Static LSPs
Manage MPLS MPLS Paths
Manage Service Tunnels
Manage VLAN Paths

The Manage filter form for the selected option opens.
2. If you are searching for a service tunnel, choose Tunnel (Service Tunnel Management) from the object type dropdown menu. Otherwise, go to step 3.
3. Click on the Filter icon. The filter configuration form opens.
4. Choose Endpoints from the Select Filter Type dropdown menu.
Note If a saved filter is selected, or a simple search filter is configured in the column headings, the Select Filter Type displays Advanced Filter by default.
To configure an advanced search, see Procedure 324.
5. If you know the source endpoint for the tunnel or path, deselect the Any Source parameter and choose the required source site. Otherwise, go to step 6.
You can choose multiple source sites in one filter.
6. If you know the destination endpoint for the tunnel or path, deselect the Any Destination parameter and choose the required destination site.
You can choose multiple destination sites in one filter.
7. Click Apply to perform the search. The filtered results are displayed.
8. To save the configured filter, see Procedure 326. Otherwise, close the filter configuration form.

Procedure 326 To save search filters
You can save search filters for reuse or modification. Saved filters appear in the filter dropdown menu for the list form; see Figure 32. Saved filters apply only to the specific
object type for which they were created, and descendant objects of that object type. You can view saved filters by clicking on the Saved Filters button of the filter configuration
form.
1. Open a list form and configure a search filter.
a. If you configure a simple filter using column headings, go to step 2. See Procedure 323 for information about simple search filters.
b. If you configure an advanced filter or an endpoints filter, leave the filter configuration form open and go to step 3. See Procedure 324 for information about
advanced search filters. See Procedure 325 for information about endpoint search filters.
2. Click on the Filter icon. The Filter configuration form opens, with the properties of the simple search filter displayed in the Filter display field.
3. Click Save. The Save Filter form opens.
The Public parameter specifies whether a filter can be accessed by other users. When the Public parameter is disabled, the filter is private and cannot be accessed by
other users.
5. Click Save. The Save Filter form closes, and the saved filter is available for future searches on the same object type.
6. Close the forms.

Procedure 327 To use a saved search filter
You can save search filters for reuse or modification; see Procedure 326. Saved filters can be selected and applied directly from list forms, or from the filter configuration form.
You can modify filters that are selected from the filter configuration form. Only filters that are applicable to the current object type and its descendant types are available.
Saved filters may contain attributes or values that are not valid for the current object. When filters contain invalid attributes and values, the 5620 SAM alerts you by displaying
red text. You can select such filters and use them to perform a search. However, the invalid attributes are not evaluated. See "Invalid attributes or values" in Section 3.6.
Perform this procedure to load and reuse saved search filters from a list form or from the filter configuration form. See Procedure 621 for information about loading a saved filter
on a topology map.
1. Open a List Form.
a. Reuse a saved search filter directly from the list form. Click on the saved filters dropdown and select a filter in the list. The filter is immediately applied and the
search results are displayed.
When a saved filter is selected, simple searches using the column headings are disabled.
b. Load and reuse a saved filter using the filter configuration form.
When you use this method, you can search for or modify a saved filter.
i. Click on the Filter icon. The filter configuration form opens.
ii. Click Saved Filters. The Saved Filters form opens.
iii. Select a filter in the list and click Load. The Saved Filters form closes and the filter properties are displayed on the filter configuration form.
iv. Modify the filter properties as required; see Procedure 324.
v. Save the modified filter, if required; see Procedure 326.
The filter is saved for the current object type.
vi. Click Apply to perform the search, then close the filter configuration form. The search results are displayed.

Procedure 328 To delete a saved search filter
1. Open a list form and click on the Filter icon. The filter configuration form opens.
2. Click on the Saved Filters button. The Saved Filters form opens.
3. Select a saved filter and click Delete. The filter is deleted.
4. Close the forms.

Procedure 329 To locate an attribute on a configuration form
The Find icon on configuration forms allows you to quickly locate tabs, panels, and parameters on configuration and property forms.
For service configuration and NE property forms with builtin navigation trees and tabs for multiple objects, the search is performed only on the active object.
1. Open a configuration form.
2. Click on the Find icon or press CTRLF. The Find Attribute in form opens.
3. Select an attribute in the list and click Show on Form. On the configuration form, the selected name of the tab, panel, or parameter is highlighted and the associated tab is
displayed.
Alternatively, you can doubleclick on the attribute row, or select an attribute and press Enter.
Note If you select a parameter or panel that resides on a hidden tab, the hidden tab is temporarily displayed.
4. Close the Find Attribute in form.

Procedure 330 To use the Parameter Search Tool
The Parameter Search Tool is part of the 5620 SAM online user documentation. The tool allows you to find and view information about configuration forms and parameters in the
5620 SAM.
You can perform a search, or select a form name from a list, to display information such as applicable devices, restrictions, defaults and configurable ranges. Links allow you to
access information about parameter options (also called enumerations).
The Parameter Search Tool does not include information about some forms and parameters, such as user preferences and some system preferences. For information about
parameters not found in the Parameter Search Tool, see the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide.
1. Choose Help User Documentation from the 5620 SAM main menu. A browser window opens with the User Documentation Home page displayed.
a. Search for a parameter or form.
i. Under the 5620 SAM tab, click on the Parameter Search Tool link. Alternatively, in the Contents panel, click on the Parameter Search Tool entry. The Search
parameter and form names page is displayed.
ii. Enter one or more search terms in the Parameter display name, Parameter XML name, or Form display name fields.
When you search using multiple search terms, the tool uses the AND operator, not the OR operator. Results are displayed only for instances where all
search terms are found. If only one of the multiple terms is found, no result is produced.
Partial words will produce results. Entering valid terms in more than one search field can reduce the number of results displayed.
Extra spaces at the beginning or end of a search term may cause no results.
iii. Click Search. A list of results is displayed.
Note Square brackets around the Form GUI name in a search result indicate that the form name shown in the result may differ from the form
name shown on the 5620 SAM GUI.
iv. Select a result. Information about the form that is associated with the result is displayed.
b. Display information about a specific form.
i. In the contents panel, expand the Parameter Search Tool entry as required and click on 5620 SAM forms. A list of forms is displayed.
ii. Select a configuration form name in the list. Information about the form is displayed.
3. In the Tabs section, click on a tab name to display only the parameters for that tab.
4. Click on a parameter name to view information about that parameter.
5. Some parameters are configured from a list of options (enumerations). To view parameter enumerations, click on the linked text in the “type” field and view the entry for the
linked text.
6. To manage the display of information, hover over the Display options box and choose from the options that appear.

Procedure 331 To filter object types
When the object type dropdown menu in a list form contains more than 10 items, you can use a filter to reduce the number of items.
You can also set defaults for list forms in custom workspaces, to reduce the number of items in the object type dropdown menu and to set the default object type; see
Procedure 49.
1. Open a list form and click on the Filter for Object Type icon; see Figure 32. The Select Object Type form opens.
2. Configure a simple search using column headings; see Procedure 323.
Alternatively, you can configure an advanced search; see Procedure 324.
3. Click Search. A filtered list of object types is displayed.
4. Select an item from the list and click OK. The Select Object Type form closes and the selected item is displayed in the Object Type field.

Procedure 332 To filter using span of control
The 5620 SAM GUI displays objects and allows object configuration based on the span of control of the user and user preferences. You can configure user preferences to specify
that only objects within the Edit Access span of control of the current user are displayed in list forms, the alarm window, the navigation tree, and on topology maps. See
Procedure 316 for more information about user preferences.
For the alarm list and most list forms, you can temporarily override the global span of control user preference. For simple searches, you can toggle the global preference on and
off; see Procedure 323. For advanced searches, you can select span on, span off, or the default global user preferences setting; see Procedure 324.
For more information about span of control, see “To create a span of control” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide.
1. Open a List Form and choose an entry from the object dropdown menu.
2. Perform one of the following.
a. Configure span settings for a simple search.
i. Configure filter properties, if required; see Procedure 323.
ii. Configure the Span On check box to override the user preferences default span setting.
iii. Click Search. A filtered list of objects is displayed.
When Span On is enabled, only the objects that are within the Edit Access span of control of the current user are displayed.
b. Configure span settings for an advanced search.
i. Click on the Filter icon to open the filter configuration form.
ii. Configure filter properties, if required; see Procedure 324.
iii. Configure the Span parameter. See Table 38 for information about the parameter options.
Table 38 Span parameter
Option Description

Span Off Span of control filtering is disabled; objects in the View Access and Edit Access spans of the current user are
displayed.

Span On Span of control filtering is enabled; only objects in the Edit Access spans of the current user are displayed.

User Span of control filtering is enabled or disabled, as configured on the User Preferences form.
Preference

iv. Click Apply and close the filter configuration form. The search results are displayed.

Procedure 333 To configure and save equipment group filters
Some list forms allow filtering based on equipment groups. The alarm window also provides equipment group filters. An equipment group filter is created by selecting from
existing equipment groups. You can save equipment group filters for reuse or modification.
Equipment group filters can return up to 12 000 items. If this limit is exceeded, the user is prompted to modify the filter to reduce the number of items.
If you choose an equipment group filter that includes a group that has been modified since the filter was applied, an icon appears beside the equipment group filter dropdown
prompting you to click the Search button to update the filter.
Multiple equipment groups must already exist before you can configure an equipment group filter. See Procedure 628 for information about how to create an equipment group.
1. Open a list form and choose an entry from the object type dropdown menu. For object types based on equipment, the Equipment Group filter dropdown is displayed.
2. Choose Select Equipment Groups from the Equipment Group filter dropdown menu. The Select Equipment Groups form opens with equipment groups listed in the
Available panel.
a. Create an equipment group filter.
i. In the Available panel, select the required equipment groups and click on the right arrow. The selected groups are moved to the Filtered by panel.
To empty the Filtered by panel, click Clear. All groups in the Filtered by panel move into the Available panel.
ii. To include data from equipment in equipment subgroups, select the Include contained Equipment Groups parameter.
b. Modify an equipment group filter.
i. Click Saved Filters. The Saved Filters form opens.
ii. Select a filter and click Load. The Saved Filters form closes and the selected filter is displayed in the Select Equipment Groups form.
iii. To remove groups from the Filtered by panel, select the groups and click the left arrow.
To empty the Filtered by panel, click Clear. All groups in the Filtered by panel move into the Available panel.
iv. To add groups to the Filtered by panel, select the groups in the Available panel and click the right arrow.
4. Save the equipment group filter, if required.
i. Click Save. The Save Equipment Group Filter form opens.
ii. Configure the required parameters.
The Public parameter specifies whether a filter can be accessed by other users. When the parameter is disabled, the filter is private and cannot be accessed by
other users.
iii. Click Save. The Save Equipment Group Filter form closes, the filter is saved, and the Select Equipment Groups form displays the saved equipment group filter.
5. Click OK to apply the filter. The Select Equipment Groups form closes and the results list is displayed based on the equipment group filter and any additional filters that
are applied to the list. The Last Search time is updated, and the equipment group filter name is displayed in the equipment group filter dropdown.

Procedure 334 To use a saved equipment group filter
Some list forms, and the alarm window, allow filtering based on equipment groups. You can apply a saved equipment group filter from the Equipment Group filter dropdown or
from the Select Equipment Groups form.
See Procedure 333 for information about configuring and saving equipment group filters.
1. Open a list form and choose an entry from the object type dropdown. For object types based on equipment, the Equipment Group filter dropdown is displayed.
2. Click on the Equipment Group filter dropdown and perform one of the following:
a. Reuse a saved equipment group filter directly from the list form. Choose a saved filter from the dropdown menu. The filter is immediately applied and the search
results are displayed.
b. Load and reuse a saved filter using the Select Equipment Groups form.
When you use this method you can search for or modify a saved filter.
i. Choose Select Equipment Groups from the Equipment Groups filter dropdown menu. The Select Equipment Groups form opens.
ii. Click Saved Filters. The Saved Filters form opens.
iii. Select a filter in the list and click Load. The filter is displayed on the Select Equipment Groups form.
iv. Click OK to apply the filter. The Select Equipment Groups form closes and the search results are displayed.
4. 4 — 5620 SAM custom workspaces
4.1 5620 SAM custom workspaces overview
4.2 Workflow to administer 5620 SAM custom workspaces
4.3 Workflow to customize 5620 SAM workspaces
4.4 Workflow to share workspaces
4.5 5620 SAM GUI custom workspace procedures

4.1 5620 SAM custom workspaces overview

Workspace customization
A workspace is a configuration of the main 5620 SAM GUI elements, such as the window layout or menu options. Systemdefined workspaces are provided, but you can also
create and save your own customized workspaces to simplify navigation and operation according to your requirements.
There are three types of workspaces:
Systemdefined—these workspaces are readonly and are provided as part of the 5620 SAM product. Systemdefined workspaces cannot be modified.
Private—a private workspace contains your customized settings and is visible only to you and an administrator.
Public—a public workspace is usable by all users on the same server. Only users with the required permissions can modify a public workspace.
You can customize the following workspace elements:
Window layouts—save your window location and size preferences for the navigation tree, topology map, alarm window, and main 5620 SAM GUI window.
Tab preferences—save tab preferences as part of a workspace.
Menus—create custom menus with userdefined names, remove menu items that you don’t need, reorder the sequence in which menu items appear, rename menu items,
and add grouping separators and custom mnemonics.
Toolbar—add, remove, reorder and rename menu icon buttons on the toolbar. You can also add custom toolbar menus, which contain selected menu items and optional
grouping separators.
Tree labels—on the routing and equipment navigation trees, choose the information to display in the label text fields, and the order in which it appears.
Topology map icon labels—map icons can show up to two custom text labels.
List forms—organize the content of the object type dropdown menus and select which buttons are displayed on some specific list forms.
You can create new custom workspaces based on a systemdefined workspace or on another custom workspace, and you can modify existing custom workspaces. You must
have the required scope of command permissions to create or modify public workspaces. Scope of command roles and user group workspace permissions are defined by a
system administrator.
You can save custom workspaces by exporting them to a specified directory. You can share these saved workspaces with another user or reuse these saved workspaces by
importing them into another 5620 SAM server.
Later releases of the 5620 SAM may contain newlyintroduced menu items that are not in the custom workspaces of an earlier release. You can add new menu items to custom
workspaces that were exported in an earlier release and then imported in a later release. For convenience, the 5620 SAM separately lists the newlyintroduced menu items; see
Procedure 415.
The workspace selector located in the upper righthand corner of the screen contains a list of systemdefined and custom workspaces, and allows you to replace the current
workspace with another from this list. You can add or remove custom workspaces in the workspace selector, and change the order in which workspaces appear in the list. See
Procedures 410 and 411.
Note Custom settings for tabs on configuration forms are saved as user preferences. They are not configured or saved as part of custom workspaces. See
Procedures 317 and 318.
4.2 Workflow to administer 5620 SAM custom workspaces
A system administrator can perform the following tasks to configure users and permissions for workspaces, and to export custom workspaces.
1. Configure the scope of command roles for custom workspaces; see “To create a scope of command role” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide.
2. Add or remove workspaces for a User Group and set mandatory workspaces settings; see “To add or remove workspaces for a user group” in the 5620 SAM System
Administrator Guide.
3. Save all custom workspaces to a directory using the Export All function; see “To export all workspaces and local tab preferences” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator
Guide.
4. Import workspaces that were previously saved as exported workspaces; see “To import workspaces and local tab preferences” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator
Guide.

4.3 Workflow to customize 5620 SAM workspaces
1. Assess your operational requirements to determine your workspace needs.
2. Create a custom workspace; see Procedure 41.
3. Configure window layouts; see Procedure 43.
4. Configure tab preferences; see Procedure 44.
5. Customize menus; see Procedure 45.
6. Customize toolbars; see Procedure 46.
7. Customize tree labels; see Procedure 47.
8. Customize topology map icon labels; see Procedure 48.
9. Customize list forms; see Procedure 49.
10. Configure the workspace selector; see Procedure 410.
11. Modify an existing workspace, as required. See Procedure 42.
12. Update a custom workspace of an earlier 5620 SAM release with new menu items from a later release; see Procedure 415.
13. Delete a workspace when it is no longer required; see Procedure 412.

4.4 Workflow to share workspaces
You can share custom workspaces with other users of the 5620 SAM. The following workflow lists the sequence of steps to follow for sharing workspaces.
1. To share a private workspace with other users, change the scope of the workspace from Private to Public. You must have the required scope of command permissions for
public workspaces. See Procedure 41.
2. To share a custom workspace by saving it to a directory, perform the following steps:
i. Export custom workspaces to a specified directory; see Procedure 413.
ii. Import workspaces from a directory; see Procedure 414.

4.5 5620 SAM GUI custom workspace procedures
The following procedures describe how to create and configure custom workspaces in the 5620 SAM.

Procedure 41 To create a new custom workspace
1. Choose Application Manage Workspaces from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Workspaces form opens.
a. Create a new workspace based on the system default workspace. Click Create. The Workspace (Create) form opens.
b. Create a new workspace based on an existing custom workspace:
i. Choose a custom workspace in the list and click Properties. The Workspace (Edit) form opens.
ii. Click Copy.
Note You must have the required scope of command permissions to create a public workspace.
6. Customize menus; see Procedure 45.
7. Customize toolbars, see Procedure 46.
8. Customize tree labels; see Procedure 47.
9. Customize topology map icon labels; see Procedure 48.

Procedure 42 To modify an existing workspace
Note You cannot modify a systemdefined workspace.
a. To modify the current custom workspace, choose Application Customize Current Workspace from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Workspace (Edit) form opens.
b. To modify a workspace other than the current workspace, perform the following:
i. Choose Application Manage Workspaces from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Workspaces form opens.
ii. Choose a custom workspace in the list and click Properties. The Workspace (Edit) form opens.
4. Customize menus as required; see Procedure 45.
5. Customize toolbars as required; see Procedure 46.
6. Customize tree labels as required; see Procedure 47.
7. Customize topology map icon labels as required; see Procedure 48.

Procedure 43 To customize window layouts
You can customize the sizes and locations for the navigation tree, topology map, and alarm windows, as well as the main 5620 SAM GUI window. See Procedure 36 for
information about how to arrange windows in the 5620 SAM GUI.
Perform this procedure to specify the window layout that appears when the custom workspace opens. You can specify the system default or the current window layout.
1. Open the Workspace form; see Procedure 41 or 42.
2. Configure the Window Layout parameter.
You can only select the Set to Default option when Custom is displayed in the Window Layout field.

Procedure 44 To configure tab preferences
You can configure a workspace to use either local tab preferences or custom tab preferences. Local tab preferences can be set manually using the tab selector, and are saved for
a specific user. Custom tab preferences are saved as part of the workspace, with settings copied from either the currently open GUI client or another workspace. When custom
tab preferences are used, the tab selector for configuration forms is disabled.
For more information about tab preferences, see Procedure 317.
2. Configure the Tab Preferences parameter.
If you choose Set from Workspace, the Select Workspace form opens; go to step 3. Otherwise, go to step 4.
3. Select a custom workspace and click OK. The tab preferences of the selected workspace are copied to the workspace you are configuring.
Note Use the Copy to Local button to copy the custom tab preferences saved in the workspace to the local tab preferences saved for the user. The Copy to
Local button is not shown during initial workspace creation, and is active only when the Tab Preferences parameter for the workspace is set to Custom.

Procedure 45 To customize menus
Perform this procedure to customize menus in a new workspace or to modify menus in an existing workspace.
Note If the workspace was created in an earlier release of the 5620 SAM, see Procedure 415.
2. Click on the Menus tab.
The All Menu Items panel contains a list of all available menu items in the 5620 SAM. The Custom Menu panel contains a list of all menu items in the custom workspace.
3. Expand items as required in the All Menu Items panel and Custom Menu panel.
a. In the Custom Menu panel, remove any menu items that are not required in the workspace. Select and delete the items using the rightclick menu or the keyboard.
Note You cannot delete the User Preferences or Manage Workspaces menu items.
b. Add menu items to the Custom Menu panel. Select items in the All Menu Items panel and drag and drop or copy the selected items to the Custom Menu panel.
The usage indicator icon beside a menu in the All Menu Items panel indicates whether the menu items for that menu are all used, partially used, or not used in the
Custom Menu. Usage indicator icons are described in the Legend at the bottom of the Workspace form. The usage indicators reduce the need to compare menu
content between the All Menu Items panel and the Custom Menu panel.
c. Add a new custom menu in the Custom Menu panel.
i. Rightclick in the location where you need to add a custom menu and choose Add Menu. A new menu appears under the selected item.
If you rightclick on empty space in the panel, the new menu appears as the last item in the list.
ii. Type a name for the new menu and press Enter.
d. To locate a menu item in the All Menu Items panel, display the menu path for the item.
i. In the Custom Menu panel, select an item, rightclick, and choose Show in All Menu Items Tree.
A dialog box displays the path for the item in the All Menu Items panel.
ii. Click OK to close the dialog box.
e. To locate a menu item in the Custom Menu panel, display the menu path for the item.
i. In the All Menu Items panel, select an item, rightclick, and choose Show in Custom Menu Tree.
A dialog box displays the path for the item in the Custom Menu. If the item appears more than once in the Custom Menu tree, multiple paths are displayed.
f. Arrange the order of menus and menu items. Drag and drop or cut and paste selected menu items in the Custom Menu panel to other locations in the tree.
If you hold the CTRL key while dragging, the drop action changes from move to copy.
g. Rename menus and items in the Custom Menu panel.
i. Select the item, rightclick, and choose Rename.
ii. Type a name and press Enter.
Renamed menu items are displayed in blue.
h. Add grouping separators in submenus. Rightclick in the location where you need to add a separator and choose Add Separator.
i. Edit the mnemonic for an item in the Custom Menu panel.
i. Select the item, rightclick, and choose Edit Mnemonic. A dropdown menu opens.
ii. Choose a letter from the dropdown menu and click OK.
The mnemonic letter is underlined in the menu item name and is used as a keyboard shortcut.
Note When you modify a workspace that is currently in use, the workspace selector displays Workspace Out of Sync. Select the current workspace from
the workspace selector dropdown menu to apply the modified settings.

Procedure 46 To customize toolbars
The 5620 SAM toolbar contains buttons that allow quick access to menus and menu items; see "Toolbar" in chapter 3. Perform this procedure to add or remove buttons and to
change the order of buttons on the toolbar.
2. Click on the Toolbar tab.
The Custom Menu panel contains a list of all the menu items in the custom workspace. The Appear on Toolbar panel displays a list of all items displayed as buttons or
dropdown menu items on the toolbar.
3. Expand items as required in the Custom Menu panel and Appear on Toolbar panel.
a. In the Appear on Toolbar panel, remove any items that are not required on the toolbar. Select and delete the items using the rightclick menu or the keyboard.
b. Add menus and menu items to the Appear on Toolbar panel. Select items in the Custom Menu panel and drag and drop or copy the selected items to the Appear on
Toolbar panel.
When you add a menu, a dropdown is placed on the toolbar. The toolbar dropdown contains the submenus and menu items shown in the Appear on Toolbar panel.
When you add a menu item, a unique icon button for the item is placed on the toolbar.
Menu items without icons can only be pasted in a menu. They cannot be placed on the toolbar as separate icon buttons. For example, the menu items in the
Window menu do not display icons.
The usage indicator icon beside a menu in the Custom Menu panel indicates whether the menu items for that menu are all used, partially used, or not used in the
Custom Menu. Usage indicator icons are described in the Legend at the bottom of the Workspace form.
c. Add a custom menu in the Appear on Toolbar panel.
i. Rightclick in the location where you need to add a custom menu and choose Add Menu. A new menu appears under the selected item.
If you rightclick on empty space in the panel, the new menu appears as the last item in the list.
ii. Type a name for the new menu and press Enter.
d. To locate a toolbar item in the Custom Menu panel, display the menu path for the item.
i. In the Appear on Toolbar panel, select an item, rightclick, and choose Show in Custom Menu Tree.
A dialog box displays the path for the item in the Custom Menu. If the item appears more than once in the Custom Menu tree, multiple paths are displayed.
e. To locate a menu or item in the Appear on Toolbar panel, display the menu path for the item.
i. In the Custom Menu panel, select an item, rightclick, and choose Show in Appear on Toolbar Tree.
A dialog box displays the path for the item in the Appear on Toolbar tree. If the item appears more than once in the Appear on Toolbar tree, multiple paths are
displayed.
f. Arrange the order of toolbar buttons. In the Appear on Toolbar panel, drag and drop or cut and paste selected menu items to other locations.
g. Rename menus and items in the Appear on Toolbar panel.
i. Select the item, rightclick, and choose Rename
Renamed menu items are displayed in blue.
h. Add grouping separators for toolbar dropdown menus. In the Appear on Toolbar panel, rightclick in the location where you need to add a separator and choose Add
Separator.
You can add separators only within menus. Separators are not available between buttons on the toolbar.
Note When you modify a workspace currently in use, the workspace selector displays Workspace Out of Sync. Select the current workspace from the
workspace selector dropdown menu to apply the modified settings.

Procedure 47 To customize tree labels
In the 5620 SAM GUI, navigation tree objects are displayed with icons and labels. Labels are displayed as text fields separated by commas.
You can customize labels for tree objects by selecting the text field definitions that appear and the order in which they appear. Labels for the Network, Unmanaged NEs, or
Discovered NEs objects cannot be customized.
Perform this procedure to customize the labels for navigation tree objects.
2. Click on the Trees tab.
3. Configure the Show Current OLC State parameter.
When the Show Current OLC State parameter is enabled, navigation tree objects below the level of the NE display their current OLC state in their labels. The display of
OLC state for NEs is not affected; the Show Current OLC State parameter is independent of the Current OLC State definition that you can select as a text field for a
network element.
4. Choose the view type from the dropdown menu. Object types and text fields are displayed in a table.
5. For each row in the table, perform the following as required:
i. Click on the table cell below Text Field #1 and choose a text field definition from the drop down menu.The selected text field definition appears in the table cell. On
the navigation tree, the corresponding value for the text field definition will appear in the Text Field #1 position for the object.
Some text field definitions appear as options below more than one text field heading. You can specify the display sequence of these text field definitions by
choosing which text field to display them in.
ii. Continue for the remaining text fields in the row.
Note 1 Click on Restore Defaults to reset text fields to the default settings for the tree type in view.
Note 2 The text field definitions for each object are displayed in navigation tree tooltips.

Procedure 48 To customize topology map icon labels
Icons on the topology map are accompanied by a descriptive label. The label is typically one or two lines of text beneath the icon.You can customize the icon label to choose the
type of information to display.
Custom NE properties are available as icon labels for NE map icons. An administrator can configure system preferences to assign custom NE property labels. See “System
preferences configuration procedures” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide.
2. Click on the Topology tab. A list of topology map icons and related information is displayed in a table.
3. In the table row for the icon label you need to customize, click below Text Field #1 and select the type of information to display.
4. If required, click below Text Field #2 and select the type of information to display.

Procedure 49 To customize list forms
For some list forms, you can customize the object type dropdown to reduce the number of menu options displayed, to create, rename, and rearrange menu items, and to choose
the default option. You can also select the action buttons that appear on the form.
1. Open the Workspace form; see Procedures 41 or 42.
Alternatively, you can click the Customize button on a list form, if available. The Workspace (Edit) form for the current workspace opens with the List Forms tab
displayed. Go to step 4.
2. Click on the List Forms tab and choose a list form type from the Form dropdown menu.
3. Click on the Object Types tab, if required.
The All Object Types panel contains a list of all object types available for the selected list form type. The Appear on Form panel contains the object types that appear in
the object type dropdown menu.
4. Expand items as required in the All Object Types panel and Appear on Form panel.
a. In the Appear on Form panel, remove any items that are not required in the object type dropdown menu. Select and delete the items using the rightclick menu or
the keyboard.
There must be at least one object type left in the Appear on Form panel. If all object types are removed, an error message is displayed.
b. Add a new custom folder in the Appear on Form panel.
i. Rightclick in the location where you need to add a folder and choose Add Folder. A new folder appears under the selected item.
If you rightclick on an empty space in the panel and choose Add Folder, the new folder appears as the last item in the list.
ii. Type a name for the new folder and press Enter.
Note If you add a new folder in the Appear on Form panel and the folder is empty, the folder is not displayed in the dropdown.
c. Rename a custom folder in the Appear on Form panel.
i. Select the folder, rightclick, and choose Rename.
d. Add object types to the Appear on Form panel. Select items in the All Object Types panel and drag and drop or copy the selected items to the Appear on Form
panel.
The usage indicator icon beside an object type in the All Object Types panel indicates whether the object types are all used, partially used, or not used in the
Appear on Form panel. Usage indicator icons are described in the Legend at the bottom of the Workspace form. Usage indicators reduce the need to compare
object types between the All Object Types panel and the Appear on Form panel.
e. To locate an object type in the All Object Types panel, display the path for the object type.
i. In the Appear on Form panel, select an item, rightclick, and choose Show in All Object Types Tree.
A dialog box displays the path for the object type in the All Object Types Tree.
f. To locate an object type in the Appear on Form panel, display the path for the object type.
i. In the All Object Types panel, select an object type, rightclick, and choose Show in Appear on Form Tree.
A dialog box displays the path for the object type in the Appear on Form Tree. If the object type appears more than once in the Appear on Form Tree,
multiple paths are displayed.
g. Arrange the order of object types. Drag and drop or cut and paste selected menu items in the Appear on Form panel to other locations in the tree.
The order of items in the Appear on Form panel determines their order in the dropdown menu.
h. Configure the default object type. The default object type is displayed in the dropdown when the list form opens.
To set the default object type, select an object type in the Appear on Form panel, rightclick, and choose Set Default. The selected object type is identified as the
default.
To set no default for the list form, select the default object type, rightclick, and choose Remove Default. When no default is set, you must select an object type
each time the list form opens.
When you set a new default object type, the system overwrites any previous default.
For the Manage Services list form, the system initially assigns the Service (Service Management) object type as the default. You can change or remove this default
as required.
For the Manage Equipment and Manage MPLS Objects list forms, the system does not assign a default object type until a userconfigured default is set.
6. Configure the button display for the list form type selected in step 2. Click on the Button Panel tab and select or deselect buttons, as required. Buttons that are not
selected will not appear on the list form.
The available buttons vary depending on the form type.
Mandatory buttons such as Search, Properties and Customize are dimmed and cannot be removed.

Procedure 410 To configure the workspace selector
Perform this procedure to add, remove, or change the sequence of workspaces in the workspace selector, or to set a workspace as the default workspace.
2. Click on the Workspaces tab. A list is displayed of the workspaces that are currently available in the workspace selector.
a. Add a workspace to the workspace selector.
i. Click Add. The Add Workspace form opens. A list is displayed of the workspaces not currently in the workspace selector.
The Add button is disabled when the Allow Mandatory Workspaces Only check box is selected during user group configuration. See “To add or remove
workspaces for a user group” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide.
ii. Choose a workspace from the list and click OK.
b. Set the default workspace that displays when the 5620 SAM opens. Choose a workspace in the list and click Set as Default.
c. Remove a workspace from the workspace selector. Choose a workspace in the list and click Delete.
You cannot remove a workspace when that workspace is set as the default workspace.
You cannot remove a workspace that is listed as a mandatory workspace in your user group.
d. Change the sequence of workspaces in the workspace selector. Choose a workspace and click Move Up or Move Down.
Note If the current workspace is deleted from the workspace selector, the workspace selector displays “Workspace Out of Sync”.

Procedure 411 To apply a different workspace using the workspace selector
Note You must add a workspace to the workspace selector before you can select it. See Procedure 410.
1. Click on the workspace selector dropdown in the top right corner of the GUI display.
2. Choose a workspace from the list. A confirmation dialog box appears.
a. Click Yes to close all internal and external 5620 SAM windows.
b. Click No to close only the alarm, navigation tree and map windows. All other open windows are retained. The new workspace settings are not applied to the open
windows.
The 5620 SAM GUI is displayed using the settings from the selected workspace. The workspace selector displays the workspace currently in use.

Procedure 412 To delete a custom workspace
Perform this procedure to permanently delete a custom workspace from the 5620 SAM. You must have the required scope of command permissions to delete a public
workspace. Systemdefined workspaces cannot be deleted.
2. Choose a workspace from the list and click Delete.
Note When you delete the current workspace, the workspace selector displays “Workspace Out of Sync”.

Procedure 413 To export custom workspaces
Perform this procedure to export custom workspaces. You must have the required scope of command permissions to export public workspaces.
a. To export multiple workspaces, choose the custom workspaces in the list and click Export. The Export Directory window opens.
b. To export a single custom workspace, choose the workspace in the list and click Export. The Export Directory window opens.
Alternatively, you can export a custom workspace by clicking on the Export button on the Workspace (Edit) form. To open the workspace (Edit) form, see
Procedure 42.
Note 1 If you do not have permissions to export a workspace the Export button is disabled.
Note 2 You cannot export systemdefined workspaces or private workspaces owned by other users.
3. Specify the export directory in the Save In dropdown, or create a directory or folder, and click Save. The selected workspace files are exported to the specified directory.
4. Close the Manage Workspaces form.

Procedure 414 To import a workspace
Perform this procedure to import 5620 SAM workspaces that were previously saved as exported workspaces. For information about how to export workspaces, see Procedure 4
13.
2. Click Import. The Import Directory window opens.
3. In the Look In dropdown, navigate to the directory that contains the workspace you need to import.
4. Configure the Overwrite User Name and Overwrite Existing Workspace(s) parameters as required, based on your permissions.
5. Click Open. A dialog box appears.
6. Click Yes. The imported workspaces are added to the Manage Workspaces form.
7. Close the Manage Workspaces form.

Procedure 415 To add new menu items to a custom workspace of an earlier 5620 SAM release
Later releases of the 5620 SAM may contain newlyintroduced menu items that are not in the custom workspaces of an earlier release.
Perform this procedure to view new menu items and add them as required to an existing custom workspace of an earlier release.
1. Open the Workspace form; see Procedure 42.
2. Click on the All Menu Items dropdown and choose New Menu Items. A list of menu items newlyintroduced in the 5620 SAM since the earlier release is displayed. The
Finished adding New Menu Items parameter is also displayed.
Note The New Menu Items function is available only if the workspace was created in an earlier 5620 SAM release.
3. Expand the items in the New Menu Items panel as required.
4. Add new menu items to the Custom Menu panel and configure as required. See Procedure 45. When you finish, if you no longer need the list of new menu items, go to
step 5. Otherwise, go to step 6.
Note When the Finished adding New Menu Items check box is left unselected, the New Menu Items panel remains as an option each time the Menus tab
on the Workspace (Edit) form is opened. The usage indicator icons display the current usage of new menu items in the custom workspace.
AlcatelLucent recommends that you select the Finished adding New Menu Items check box when the New Menu Items option is no longer required.
5. Select the Finished adding New Menu Items check box.
Note After the Finished adding New Menu Items check box is selected and you click on the Apply or OK buttons, the New Menu Items option is no longer
displayed.
5. 5 — 5620 SAM navigation tree
5.1 Navigation tree overview
5.2 Basic navigation tree procedures

5.1 Navigation tree overview
The 5620 SAM navigation tree provides multiple views that list the equipment groups, NEs, routing instances, protocols, and other objects in the 5620 SAM managed network.
Objects are listed in a parentchild hierarchy. You can expand the tree to access child objects or collapse the tree for a broader view. You can access property forms, create
equipment groups, and perform other functions using the navigation tree window.
For more information about network objects, see chapter 13.
In most system workspaces, the navigation tree window opens by default when the 5620 SAM client is opened. See chapter 4 for information about workspaces. See Procedure
38 for information about managing the display of windows in the GUI.
You can use the navigation tree to locate specific objects in the physical and logical network views. See Procedure 51 for information about searching for objects in the
navigation tree.
The display of objects in the navigation tree is affected by the span of control settings in user preferences; see "Span of control" in chapter 3.
You can use the following methods to navigate the tree and manage objects.
Doubleclick on an object or click on the + sign to display child objects. When you doubleclick on an object that has no child objects, a properties form for the object
opens.
Doubleclick on an object or click the sign to hide child objects.
Select an object and use the cursor keys to navigate the object hierarchy. The up and down arrow keys move the selection up or down in the tree. The right and left arrow
keys expand or collapse objects and move up or down in the hierarchy.
Rightclick on an object to open a contextual menu, and choose an option. The menu options are specific to the object type. See "Contextual menus" in this section for
more information.
Note Keyboardbased navigation tree operations may not function as expected when you open the client GUI using a thirdparty access tool, for example, a Citrix
server.
Figure 51 shows the 5620 SAM navigation tree window, with the Equipment view selected.
Figure 51 5620 SAM navigation tree Equipment view

Icons and labels
Objects in the navigation tree display on a single line with icons and labels.
Icons indicate alarm status and object type. The circle at the left indicates the aggregated alarm status. The square indicates the alarm status for the object. Object types are
represented by a unique 5620 SAM icon for each type. Click on the Legend icon on the physical topology map toolbar for a description of alarm and equipment group icons.
Labels are displayed as text fields separated by commas, and typically provide an object description, ID number, IP address, or other information such as operational or
administrative state. You can customize labels for tree objects by selecting the text field definitions that appear and the order in which they appear; see Procedure 47.

Equipment groups
Equipment groups allow you to organize the network into logical groupings of NEs, for example, in a geographical area, or by equipment type. An equipment group is sometimes
called a topology group. Some of the views in the view selector, for example the Equipment view, allow you to use the navigation tree to create and manage equipment groups.
An equipment group can contain up to 2000 NEs. The 5620 SAM client displays NEs in the navigation tree up to a limit of 500 NEs per group. An administrator can specify a
system preference for the default number of NEs to display when a group is expanded on the tree (up to 500); see “To configure 5620 SAM system preferences” in the 5620 SAM
System Administrator Guide. See Procedure 53 for information about managing NEs in equipment groups on the navigation tree.
See Procedure 628 for information about how to create equipment groups.

Navigation tree toolbar
A toolbar in the 5620 SAM navigation tree window contains the view selector, the Make Root At Top Level icon, the Copy to Clipboard icon, and the Find icon. The Find field is
located below the navigation tree toolbar.

View selector
The view selector is a dropdown menu that lists the physical and logical network views available in the main navigation tree window.
You can choose the following views:
Equipment—displays the physical objects that the 5620 SAM manages
OSPF—displays all OSPF objects in the network
ISIS—displays all ISIS objects in the network
Small Cells—displays all Small Cell Gateway objects and equipment; see the 5620 SAM Small Cells User Guide for more information
Routing—displays the device routing instances and child objects, such as the network interfaces and the configured protocols
Ring Group—displays the ring group objects that the 5620 SAM manages
Cloud Network—displays DC POD or interconnect management entities; see the Nuage Virtualization User Guide for more information
Wireless Logical RAN —displays a logical view of all managed wireless RAN eNodeB NEs and objects; see the 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide for more information

Make Root At Top Level icon
The root is the highestlevel object in the tree. When Equipment is selected in the view selector, you can change the root of the tree to reduce the display of objects in the tree.
The Make Root At Top Level icon restores the navigation tree to the default Network root when a lowerlevel object is the current root.
See Procedure 52 for information about changing the root object of the navigation tree.

Copy to Clipboard icon
You can use the Copy to Clipboard icon to copy the property form identifier for one or more objects in the tree to the 5620 SAM clipboard. You can use the clipboard to open
forms, send identifiers to other users or applications, and configure search filters. On the topology map, you can use the clipboard to search for objects and create physical links;
see chapter 6.
See Procedure 313 for more information about the 5620 SAM clipboard,

Find icon and Find field
You can use the Find icon or the Find field to locate and highlight objects in the navigation tree.
See Procedure 51 for more information about locating objects in the tree.

Contextual menus
When you rightclick on an object in the 5620 SAM navigation tree, a contextual menu opens for that object. You can use contextual menus to:
create objects
configure object properties
perform maintenance functions
change the state of objects
open a different management interface, for example, a CLI
change the root object in the navigation tree
The available contextual menu options vary, depending on the object type.

5.2 Basic navigation tree procedures
The following procedures describe how to use the 5620 SAM navigation tree.

Procedure 51 To locate objects in the navigation tree
You can use the Find icon or the Find field in the navigation tree header to locate objects in the navigation tree. Objects that match the search terms are highlighted sequentially
in the tree. Each search can produce up to 200 results.
A system preferences threshold may limit the number of NEs displayed in the navigation tree when an equipment group is expanded. When you use the Find icon or Find field,
the search results include NEs and descendant objects that were not displayed prior to the search, even if they exceed the system preferences NE display threshold.
Note The 5620 SAM client displays NEs in the navigation tree up to a maximum limit of 500 NEs per equipment group. When an equipment group contains more
than 500 NEs, some objects may not appear in the search results.
When the system limit of 500 NEs is already displayed under the equipment group, and a matching NE object or descendant object is not among the displayed
NEs, the matching object is not displayed or highlighted.
See Procedure 53 for more information about managing the display of NEs in equipment groups.
1. To locate an object using the Find icon:
i. Click the Find icon or press CTRLF. The search panel appears.
ii. Enter search terms in the attribute fields. The available fields vary depending on the selected view.
iii. Click Find in the search panel or press Enter. The navigation tree expands to show the first matching object highlighted.
iv. To find additional matching objects, click the Next button or press F3. The navigation tree expands to show the next matching object highlighted in the tree.
The Next and Previous buttons are available when more than one object matches the search term.
v. To return to the previous matching object in the navigation tree, click the Previous button or press ShiftF3.
vi. To remove all search terms from the search panel, click Clear.
vii. To close the search panel, click the Find icon at the top of the navigation tree window or press CTRLF.
2. To locate an object using the Find field:
Note For some of the views in the view selector the Find field is not available.
i. Enter a search term in the Find field. Search terms are based on object labels. A tooltip for the Find field shows a list of the available labels. See Procedure 47 for
information about how to customize labels.
ii. Press Enter. The navigation tree expands to show the first matching object highlighted.
iii. To find additional matching objects, click the Next button or press F3. The navigation tree expands to show the next matching object highlighted in the tree.
The Next and Previous buttons are enabled when more than one object matches the search term.
iv. To return to the previous matching object in the navigation tree, click on the Previous button or press ShiftF3.

Procedure 52 To change the root object of a navigation tree
The root is the highestlevel object in the tree. When Equipment is selected in the view selector, you can change the root of the tree.
Perform this procedure to make a lowerlevel object the root of the current navigation tree window or a new navigation tree window, or to restore the default Network root.
1. Open the navigation tree window and select the Equipment view.
2. Change the root object of a tree. Perform any of the following:
a. Make a selected object the root of the current tree. Rightclick on the object and choose Make Root. The navigation tree is refreshed with the selected object as the
root of the tree.
b. Make a selected object the root of a new navigation tree window. Rightclick on the object and choose Make Root in New Tree. A new navigation tree window
opens with the selected object as the root of the tree.
Up to five navigation tree windows can be open at one time.
The Make Root in New Tree option is also available when you rightclick on an equipment group in the topology map navigation tree, or on the map background. A
new navigation tree window opens with the equipment group selected or displayed in the map as the root of the tree.
The Make Root In New Tree option is not available for the root object of a tree.
c. Restore the default Network object as the root object. Click on the Make Root At Top Level icon on the navigation tree toolbar.
The Make Root At Top Level icon is available when a lowerlevel object is the root of the tree.

Procedure 53 To manage NEs in equipment groups on the navigation tree
On the navigation tree, you can open an NEs list form for a selected equipment group and use the form to search for NEs, to show the NEs you require on the tree, and to move
NEs to other groups. The form lists all of the NEs in the selected equipment group.
An administrator can specify a threshold value in system preferences for the default number of NEs to display when a group is expanded in the tree. See “To configure 5620 SAM
system preferences” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide. When an equipment group contains more NEs than the threshold value, some of the NEs are not displayed in
the tree. When the threshold value is less than 500, you can use the NEs list form to temporarily display additional NEs in the group, above the threshold amount, up to 500.
An equipment group can contain up to 2000 NEs. The 5620 SAM client displays NEs in the navigation tree up to a maximum limit of 500 NEs per group. When an equipment
group contains more than 500 NEs, some of the NEs are not displayed in the tree. You can use the NEs list form to access all of the NEs in the group, or to move NEs to other
groups.
1. Open the NEs list form for an equipment group in the navigation tree. Rightclick on the equipment group object and choose List NEs. The NEs list form opens.
When you expand an equipment group in the tree, and the number of NEs in the group equals or exceeds the threshold value set in system preferences, a message is
displayed in the navigation tree under the equipment group object. You can click on the message to open the NEs list form for the equipment group.
The message remains in the tree display, even if the number of NEs in the equipment group is reduced below the system preferences threshold.
2. Manage NEs using the NEs list form. Perform any of the following:
a. Locate NEs in the tree or display additional NEs. Select an NE in the list and click Show on Tree. The selected NE is highlighted in the tree.
If the selected NE was not previously displayed in the tree, it is added to the display for the equipment group and highlighted.
Alternatively, you can use the Find icon or Find field in the navigation tree header to locate NEs in the tree or to display additional NEs; see Procedure 51.
The display of additional NEs is not preserved. If the navigation tree window is closed or the root object of the tree is changed, the next display of the NEs in the
group reverts to the default display.
Up to 500 NEs (the maximum system limit) can be displayed under an equipment group in the navigation tree. If this limit is exceeded, a message is displayed.
b. Move NEs to other groups.
i. Select one or more NEs in the list and click Move to Group. A dropdown menu opens.
ii. Choose an equipment group in the menu. The selected NEs are moved to the selected group.
Alternatively, you can move NEs to different groups by clicking and dragging icons on the navigation tree or topology map.
You can create a new group, if required; see Procedure 628.
3. Close the list form.
When the NE List form for an equipment group is opened from the navigation tree, it closes automatically when you change the view in the view selector, close the
navigation tree window, or change the root object of the tree.
6. 6 — 5620 SAM topology map management
6.1 5620 SAM topology map management overview
6.2 5620 SAM topology map types
6.3 Working with topology maps
6.4 Workflow to use 5620 SAM topology maps
6.5 Basic 5620 SAM topology map procedures
6.6 5620 SAM topology map configuration procedures
6.7 5620 SAM topology map management procedures

6.1 5620 SAM topology map management overview
The following 5620 SAM network topology maps are available:
physical composite service
service tunnel LSP path
service LSP crossconnect

EPS path

Each map displays network objects and information, and provides contextual menus to open forms that display additional information. In the context of a 5620 SAM map, a link
object, such as a physical link or service tunnel, is called an edge. An object other than a link between objects, such as an NE or equipment group, is called a vertex. Figure 61
shows the main map elements.
Figure 61 Map elements

Map window
The map window includes the following:
a title bar
a map panel that displays the network objects
a navigation tree that lists the equipment groups
a toolbar, which consists of a view selector, saved filter selector, search field, and icons that perform various functions
The title bar of the map window displays the following information:
map type, for example, Physical Topology
path from the network root to the currently displayed equipment group; each step in the path is called a breadcrumb
map number, for example, the first or the tenth map opened

Map panel
The map panel is associated logically with the map navigation tree. As the user navigates through the equipment groups in the map navigation tree, the contents displayed on the
map panel change. The equipment group that is selected in the map navigation tree is the group that is displayed on the map panel.
When you doubleclick on an equipment group object, the contents of the group on the map panel are displayed and the group is selected and opened in the map navigation tree.
When you doubleclick on other map objects, such as a router or link, a property form opens. Rightclick on any map object to display a contextual menu.
When map objects are linked between different equipment groups, the line representing the connection terminates on a map object called a connector. The connector indicates
that the endpoint of the link resides in another equipment group. The label of the connector icon is the name of the equipment group to which the link points. Connector objects do
not have contextual menus.
When a physical link is created between a port or LAG managed by the 5620 SAM and an unmanaged object, the unmanaged object is called a remote endpoint. The remote
endpoint label is configured by the user when the physical link is created.
You can configure a background image to display in the map panel for an equipment group, for example, a map image of North America. You can position device icons and
equipment group icons in the map of the network to reflect their relative geographic locations.

Map background contextual menu
Rightclick on the map background to open a contextual menu. See Table 62 for information about the menu options.

Selecting map objects
Click Select Tool to select an object on the map. To select multiple objects, press the Shift key and click on each object that you want to select, or draw a selection rectangle
around all of the objects that you want to select on the topology map. You can also press CTRLA to select all of the objects on a map.
You can select one or more objects and view them in a separate map by rightclicking on the selection and choosing Show Only Selected. The map is then filtered to display only
the selected objects and the links between them. Links to other objects are excluded. To revert to the previous view, rightclick in the map and choose Cancel Show Only.
When multiple objects are selected, you can press the F3 key to shift the map focus to the next object, and press CTRLF3 to shift the map focus to the previous object.
You can also select all of the NEs that are attached to an NE by selecting one or more NE and rightclicking and choosing Select Attached.
To deselect a selected NE, press the CTRL key and click on the NE.

Moving map objects
The 5620 SAM allows you to move map objects in the following ways:
in the map panel; for example, to add a router to an equipment group by dragging and dropping the router object to the equipment group object in the map panel
from the map panel to the map navigation tree; for example, to add a router to an equipment group by dragging and dropping the router object from the map panel to the
equipment group object on the map navigation tree
after discovery by using either the AutoLayout Tool icon or by moving the tiled icons to a new map panel location
between two maps
in the map navigation tree; for example, to make an equipment group the immediate descendant of another equipment group by dragging and dropping one equipment
group object to another equipment group object in the map navigation tree
When an equipment group is created, users with Topology Mgmt privileges can populate the group from the topology map by dragging and dropping map objects into the group in
the map panel or in the map navigation tree, or from the map panel to the map navigation tree.
Note You cannot move map objects to or from groups that are not within your span of control.
By default, users can move map objects and change the layout of the objects on the map, however the changes are not saved to the database when the map is closed. The
ability to save changes to the layout of topology maps is controlled by scope of command roles and access permissions. Permissions are set by using 5620 SAM security
configuration forms. See “5620 SAM user security” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide for information about setting access privileges.
The Reload icon indicates when you move a map object and change the layout of the objects. The Reload icon changes to indicate whether moving a map object and changing
the layout of the objects is saved to the database. See "Map toolbar" in this section for information about the Reload icon.
Note When you move a map object in the map panel, the X,Y coordinates for the map object change. If you have update and execute scope of command access
permission, this change affects all users that display the map view and the equipment group.
Connectors can only be moved in the map panel. Connectors cannot be moved to another equipment group.

Finding map objects quickly
The Search field beside the toolbar icons allows you to quickly locate a map object. When you enter a text string in the Search field and press , the 5620 SAM searches each
object name in the map for the string. If a match is found, the map focus shifts to the object. If multiple matches are found, you can press the F3 key to shift the map focus to
the next object, and press CTRLF3 to shift the map focus to the previous object.

Equipment groups
Equipment groups allow you to organize the network into logical groupings of NEs, for example, in a geographical area, or by equipment type. An equipment group is sometimes
called a topology group. Equipment groups are displayed as objects in the map navigation tree, and as icons on the map.
The equipment group icon on the map is divided into four sections. The main section on the left of the icon represents the most severe state of the devices and links that are
immediately descendant of the group. The top right square represents the aggregated alarm status. The middle right square represents the most severe state of all descendant
devices. The bottom right square represents the most severe state of all descendant links. See chapter 38 for more information about viewing alarm status information in a map
navigation tree. To troubleshoot alarms using topology maps, see the 5620 SAM Troubleshooting Guide.
You can select an equipment group and display the NEs in that group on the map with a selected background image. An equipment group can contain up to 2000 NEs. However,
the 5620 SAM client can display a maximum of 500 NEs on the topology map. See Procedure 632 for information about managing the display of equipment groups with more
than 500 NEs.
See Procedures 628, 629, and 630 for more information about how to create and populate equipment groups.

Links and link groups
The topology maps display single links and multiple links that connect two map objects. Links are used to represent the physical connectivity between two NEs or logical
connectivity, such as service tunnels. The map uses an arrow to display the direction of a unidirectional link. Multiple links between 2 objects are grouped, by default, as one link
with no defined direction. Bidirectional links are displayed with no defined direction. A link group is displayed with a plus sign located on the link object. You can rightclick on the
plus sign and choose Expand Group to view all of the associated links. The expand threshold of links on the topology maps displays up to 10 links.
When you doubleclick on a single link, the properties form for the link opens. When you doubleclick on the link group object for multiple links, a list form opens displaying all of
the links that belong to the link group. For the physical, service tunnel, and LSP maps, a list form opens regardless of whether there is one link or multiple links in the link group.
A bidirectional link group is displayed with a plus sign icon located in the middle of the link object. A unidirectional link or link group is displayed using an arrow icon on the object
pointing in the direction of the path.
The color of a single link object is determined by the status of each link endpoint. The color of a link group object is determined by the most serious alarm that is raised for a link
in the link group.

Breadcrumbs
Breadcrumbs are displayed along the top of the map panel. Breadcrumbs indicate, from left to right, the hierarchy of the equipment groups to the group currently displayed in the
map panel. The default top of the hierarchy, the breadcrumb at far left, is the entire network. Click on a breadcrumb to open the map for the corresponding group.

Map navigation tree
The following network topology maps display a map navigation tree:
physical map
service tunnel map
You can use the map navigation tree:
for nonlinear navigation to any equipment group on the map
to display the equipment group hierarchy starting from the entire network
The map navigation tree displays:
equipment groups, including group names
status of the equipment groups
When you click on a map object in the map navigation tree, the contents of the object are displayed in the map panel, and the map object is selected.
Some functions of the navigation tree window apply also to the map navigation tree. See section 5.1 for information about using the navigation tree.

Contextual menus for objects in the map navigation tree
Rightclick on an object in the map navigation tree to open a contextual menu. The available contextual menu options vary, depending on the object.

Map toolbar
The map toolbar allows you to manage a 5620 SAM map view. The toolbar is above the map panel in the map window. Figure 62 shows the map toolbar elements.
Figure 62 Map toolbar elements

Table 61 describes the map toolbar elements.
Caution 1 Applying an information table configuration to many objects on the map may take a long time.
Caution 2 When you reload a map from the database, the database is unavailable during the loading period.
Caution 3 The current composite service map is redrawn when you click the Rearrange by Service Tiers icon, and the prior layout of the composite service map
cannot be recalled.
Caution 4 After you click the AutoLayout Tool icon and confirm the action, any existing map layout is overwritten and cannot be recovered. If you are satisfied
with the layout of the icons on the map, do not use the AutoLayout Tool icon.
Table 61 Map toolbar elements descriptions
Toolbar Description
element
name

Map type The map type selector is a dropdown menu that lists the map view options that you can choose to specify the view. The map type selector
selector offers the following views:
Physical Topology
Service Tunnel Topology

Saved The saved filter selector is a dropdown menu that lists the save map filters.
filter
selector

Filter icon A filter allows you to apply one or more object filters to a map view, to narrow the range of objects that are displayed. Filters can be saved for
future searches on similar objects. When a filter is applied, the name of the filter is displayed on the saved filter selector. Only the objects that
the filter returns are displayed, with the following exceptions:
If one link endpoint is displayed, the other endpoint is also displayed, even when the filter excludes the endpoint.
If a filter does not include a link filter, only the links between the returned NEs are displayed.
Filters can be saved as private or public. You can apply a span of control to public filters to filter out objects that are not in the current user span
of control. Public filters can only be changed by the user who created them. Private filters appear only for the user who creates them.
Click the Filter icon to create and save filters that specify the objects displayed in a map.
You can create a filter based on a combination of search criteria. Figure 64 shows the navigation buttons that you can use to create, apply, and
save a map filter. See Procedure 620 for information about creating a topologymap filter. See chapter 3 for information about configuring filters.

Alarmed Click the Alarmed links/All links shown icon to specify any of the following on the topology map:
links/All all links
links only link groups with associated alarms
shown only specific links with associated alarms
icon link groups and the specific links within the link groups with associated alarms
The Alarmed links/All links shown icon options are:
All links shown (default)—the icon is displayed in white and all links are displayed on the map.
Show Only Alarmed—the icon is displayed in yellow and only link groups with associated alarms are displayed on the map.
Enable Alarm Link Pullout—the icon is displayed in yellow and links with associated alarms are displayed on the map. The link groups
containing the pulled out alarm links with unknown physical characteristics are displayed in grey.

Go Back Click the Go Back icon to navigate between previously viewed equipment groups. For example, if you are viewing Router Group 1 then view
icon Router Group 2, click the Go Back icon to return to Router Group 1. The Go Back icon only functions in one map type; both previously viewed
equipment groups must be the same map type.

Bookmark Bookmarks are used to create shortcuts to frequently visited locations on a map. Click the Bookmark icon to add a bookmark or manage
icon existing bookmarks.

Find icon Click the Find icon to search for network objects on a map. You can choose to search for specific vertices or edges. A list form opens that
allows you to configure specific criteria to filter the results of your search. See chapter 3 for information about performing searches.
When the network object is found, the map navigation tree displays the equipment group that contains the object. If necessary, the 5620 SAM
scrolls to the part of the map where the object is located.

Save To Click the Save To File icon to save the map view or the full map. You can choose the location to save the map image and the file type. See
File icon Procedure 68 for more information about using the Save To File icon.

Global Click the Global Info Tables icon to create information table configurations, apply information table configurations globally, or turn the global
Info information table option off. See Procedures 614 and 615 for more information about using the Global Info Tables icon. See Caution 1 above.
Tables
icon

Reload Click the Reload icon to load the topology map from the 5620 SAM database. The topology map is updated to display the latest configurations.
icon The Reload icon changes to indicate whether moving a map object and changing the layout of the object is saved to the database. See Caution
indicating 2 above.
no
database
changes
Reload
icon
indicating
database
changes

Overview Click the Overview Window icon to open the Overview window. Use the Overview window to pan the entire map, or a specific group or service,
Window and the area that you want to view. Figure 63 shows the Overview window.
icon

Legend Click the Legend icon to open a contextual menu that displays a list of map legend types if multiple legends are available, or opens the Legend
icon form. Choose a legend type from the contextual menu to open the Legend form with the appropriate legend tab displayed. Depending on the
map type, the following legend types are available:
icons—displays the icons used to identify objects; always appears
colors—displays the color scheme used to identify map objects
highlight sessions—displays the highlight sessions for the current map, and allows you to clear one or more sessions
other legend types that apply to a type of map

Rearrange The Rearrange by Service Tiers icon is available only for composite service topology maps. Figure 613 shows the composite service map.
by
by
Service Click the Rearrange by Service Tiers icon to organize the composite service tier icons in the map panel by service tier. The service tier icons
Tiers icon are displayed in the following order from the top of the panel:
tier 1 icons (typically IES and VPRN services)
tier 2 icons (typically VPLS and MVPLS)
tier 3 icons (typically satellite HVPLS and VLL services)
tier 4 icons (typically VLAN services)
.
.
.
tier n icons (userassigned)
See Caution 3 above.

Auto Click the Autolayout icon to lay out the map icons.
Layout The layout options are:
icon(1) Circular — emphasizes ring and star topologies in networks. Objects are grouped according to the network structure and arranged in
circles or radial tree structures.
Smart Organic—emphasizes inherent data groupings and symmetries. This information helps with understanding the interconnections of
complex structures.
Endpoint Layout (VPLS, VLL, mirror, and composite service sites only) all endpoints are snapped close to the associated parent site.
The AutoLayout tool is useful when:
many newly discovered NEs are tiled together on the map and difficult to view
a large number of network device icons are spread out across the map and cannot be easily viewed without zooming out
After you click the AutoLayout icon, map icons with links between them are placed closer together in the center of the map. Icons without links
are placed on the periphery of the linked icons. See Caution 4 above.

Display Click the Display Filterable Flat Map icon to quickly display a flat map of the current topology map view. You can also view a flat map on the
Filterable 5620 SAM by choosing Application Flat Maps from the 5620 SAM main menu.
Flat Map
icon

Select Click the Select Tool icon to select and move an object on the map or to view object information. You can select and move multiple objects by
Tool icon pressing the Shift key and clicking on each object you want to select, or by drawing a selection rectangle around all the objects you want to
select on the topology map.

Hand Tool Click the Hand Tool icon to switch to a pan mode. Click on the background to move the contents of the map in any direction. When you are in
icon(2) the pan mode and you scroll over an object, you can select and move an object on the map or view object information. You can select and
move multiple objects by pressing the Shift key and clicking on the object you need to select.

Zooming The ability to zoom in and out on a map allows you to view hundreds of map objects at once to see the scope of the network, or view the
in information for one NE. Click the Zoom in Tool and Zoom out Tool icons and click on the map to resize the objects in a map or use the mouse
wheel to zoom in and zoom out of topology maps. Click on the map and roll the mouse wheel forward to zoom in or roll the mouse wheel
backward to zoom out. Each roll of the mouse wheel brings the map objects closer or further.
When a map is at a low zoom level, the icons are displayed at a reduced size, link lines are thinner and labels are hidden. Labels are displayed
and when you click the reduced icon. When a map is viewed at a high zoom level, the icons are displayed at normal size, link lines are thicker and
zooming labels are displayed.
out

using a
mouse or
toolbar
icons(3)

Scale Use the scale dropdown menu to increase or decrease the map zoom. You can choose a zoom percentage value from 25% to 300%, or fit all
dropdown objects in the window. The scale dropdown menu displays the current scale of the map.
menu

Notes
1. You can also apply the autolayout option to a contiguous group by rightclicking on one of the selected objects. See Procedure 622 for information about using the autolayout function.
2. To temporarily activate the panning function, press and hold the space bar, and then click in the map panel.
3. Object icons are displayed at a reduced size in a flat map.
Figure 63 shows the Overview window.
Figure 63 Overview window

Figure 64 shows the navigation buttons that you can use to create, apply, and save a map filter.
Figure 64 Filtered map form

Zooming in and out
The ability to zoom in and out on a map allows you to view hundreds of map objects at once to see the scope of the network, or view the information for one NE. See Procedure
611 for information about zooming functions.
When a map is viewed at a low zoom level, the icons are displayed at a reduced size, link lines are thinner and labels are hidden. Labels are displayed when you click the
reduced icon. When a map is viewed a a high zoom level, icons are displayed at normal size, link lines are thicker and labels are displayed.

Bookmarks
You can bookmark frequently visited areas of the map for easier navigation when you return to those locations. Bookmarks are associated with a map view. To use the
bookmark, you must be in the same view where you created the bookmark or a view that shares the same group, for example, an equipment group that belongs to both the
physical topology map and the service tunnel map. Otherwise, the bookmark menu option is disabled.
You can access the bookmark dropdown menu using the Bookmark icon on the map toolbar. Figure 62 shows the Bookmark icon. The bookmark menu is divided into two
sections and separated by a horizontal line. The top section of the dropdown menu contains the bookmark management functions, and the bottom section contains the user
created dynamic list of bookmarks.
The list of bookmarks is updated when you add, remove, group, or rearrange the bookmarks. The menu items can be bookmarks or folders, which can expand to display more
bookmarks or folders.
Note A large number of bookmarks is difficult to manage. Bookmarks should be organized in folders for better usability and easier management. AlcatelLucent
recommends that you create a maximum of 1000 bookmarks.
When a bookmark is selected, the map panel displays the bookmarked equipment group. The map navigation tree expands to display the equipment group.
When a valid bookmarked equipment group is moved to another group, the bookmark for the group is updated to correspond to the new location of the group. If the bookmark
location is not valid, for example, an equipment group was deleted since the bookmark was created, an invalid bookmark message is displayed. The map panel remains
unchanged.
Click on the Add Bookmark menu option to add the equipment group currently viewed in the map panel as a bookmark. Click on the Manage Bookmarks menu option to open the
Manage Bookmarks form. Figure 65 shows the Manage Bookmarks form.
Figure 65 Manage Bookmarks form

The Manage Bookmarks form has a list panel on the left in which the bookmarks and folders are listed in a tree structure. You can drag and drop bookmarks and folders in and
out of other folders in the list panel. Select a bookmark or folder for editing. Click on an empty area to deselect the tree object. Doubleclick on a toplevel folder to open the folder
and display its contents. A turner to the left of the descendant folder object in the list panel indicates that the folder contains descendant objects, such as bookmarks or other
folders.
The names of invalid bookmarks, and bookmarks and folders that are not from the current view, are displayed in italics.
The following action buttons are displayed to the right of the list panel:
Close—used to close the Manage Bookmarks form. All changes in the form are saved when you click Close.
New Folder—used to create a folder in the list panel. The Folder Properties dialog box appears.
If a folder is selected in the list panel, the new folder that is an immediate descendant object of the selected folder.
If no folder is selected in the list panel, the new folder is created as a toplevel folder.
Rename—used to rename a folder or bookmark. The Rename dialog box appears. The Name field contains the name of the selected folder or bookmark. This button is
enabled only when a folder or bookmark is selected in the list panel.
Delete—used to delete a selected folder or bookmark from the list panel. This button is enabled only when a folder or bookmark is selected.

Information tables
You can configure information tables that are displayed beside map objects. An information table contains specific values, such as an NE chassis type, software descriptor, and
system address. Information tables are displayed beside each map object to which the configuration applies. You can drag and drop information tables on topology maps, but the
new table location is not saved with the map.
Note You cannot apply an information table configuration to link groups or equipment groups.
Multiple information tables can be applied to map objects, but only one table is displayed at a time. Tab indicators appear on the information table to indicate that multiple
information tables apply to the map object. To cycle through the applied information tables, click on the information table and press the Tab key.
You can specify that information tables are displayed only during a mouseover operation, which is when the mouse pointer passes over an object. You can also specify whether
an information table contains a header. Header display is enabled by default and cannot be disabled for mouseover tables. See Procedure 614 for more information. Mouseover
supports cycling between tables by pressing the Tab key.
The following types of information tables can be applied to map objects:
global—available for all map types
selected—available for all map types
highlight—available for maps that support the highlight function
others that apply to a specific map type

Global Info Tables
When one or more information table configurations are available for a map type, you can apply an information table configuration to all map objects using the Global Info Tables
icon. You can also use this icon to turn the global information table configuration off. See Procedure 615 for more information about how to use the Global Info Tables feature.
Figure 66 shows a map view with an information table configuration applied to all map objects.
Figure 66 Applied global information table configuration

Selected Info Tables
You can apply an information table configuration to one map object or a selected group of map objects by rightclicking on the object or selected group. You can also use this
contextual menu to turn the selected information table configuration off. See Procedure 616 for information about how to use the Selected Info Tables feature.

Map Highlight Info Tables
On a map that supports the highlight function, you can apply an information table configuration to a map highlight by rightclicking on an existing highlight session from the
Highlight Sessions tab of the Legendtopology form. You can also use this contextual menu to turn the highlight information table configuration off. See Procedure 617 for more
information about how to use the Map Highlight Info Tables feature.

Contextual menus
You can open contextual menus for groups in the topology map window by rightclicking on the map background, or rightclicking on group objects in the map navigation tree or
map. The options available vary depending on whether a menu is opened from the map background or from an object. Table 62 describes the menu options.
Table 62 Topology map contextual menu options
Option Description

Delete Deletes the equipment group selected or displayed on the map; see Procedure 631

Discover Opens the Manage Services form
Transport
services

Discovery Opens the Discovery Manager (Edit) form. You can create NE discovery rules and discover NEs; see chapter 11.
Manager

Duplicate Contains the following options:
Links Highlight Duplicate Links
Delete Duplicate Links
Both a manual link and a discovered physical link can exist on the same two endpoints. When this happens, a duplicate link alarm is raised.
The alarm only occurs on pointtopoint links and when both endpoints are ports or LAGS. You can identify the duplicate links by choosing the
Highlight Duplicate Links option. You can remove these duplicate links by choosing the Delete Duplicate Links option. This action prompts
you with a warning, then deletes all of the manually created physical links. The alarm is not raised on existing manual links (for example,
those in place after a database upgrade).

Equipment Contains the following options:
Create Group: opens a form to create a descendant equipment group for the group selected or displayed in the map; see Procedure 6
28
Create Physical Link: opens a form to create links between map objects; see Procedure 634.
Create Optical Link; see the 5620 SAM Optical User Guide
Create Radio Link; see Procedure 635

Highlight Identifies MTU mismatches between physical ports. When the configured MTU values on two or more endpoints do not match, an alarm is
MTU raised to notify the operator of a possible configuration error.
Mismatch This function is supported on both pointtopoint and broadcast physical links. MTU mismatches can also be discovered by conducting an
RCA audit. See Procedure 933 for more information.

Highlight Identifies the nearest customer links between nodes; see Procedure 1415 for more information
Nearest
Customer
Links

Highlight Identifies the nearest NonTwo Port MAC Relay links between nodes; see Procedure 1415 for more information
Nearest
NonTPMR
Links

Highlight Identifies and displays hidden links between nodes
Upper
Layer
Adjacency
Links

List NEs Opens a list form of all the NEs contained in the group selected or displayed on the map

List Opens a list form of all the unmanaged NEs contained in the group selected or displayed on the map
Unmanaged
NEs

Make Flat Opens a flat map of the group
Map for
Group

Make Root Opens a Navigation Tree window with the equipment group that is selected or displayed in the map as the root of the tree
in New Tree

Properties Opens the property form for the equipment group selected or displayed on the map. This form allows you to view readonly information and to
configure parameters associated with the equipment group.
If the Copy button is available, you can use the Copy button to create equipment groups in the network using the same parameter information.

Reference Takes a snapshot of the physical topology at a specific time. Any deviation from this checkpoint can then be subsequently shown. You can
choose from the following options:
Reference all Discovered Links in NE Group: creates checkpoints for all currently discovered links. Any object that was previously
checkpointed and is operationally down is left untouched. Any object that goes operationally down in the future is not removed, but is
marked as operationally down.
Clear Reference for All Discovered Links in NE Group: clears all object checkpoints. Any object that is operationally down (shown as a
red link) is removed from the database. Any noncheckpointed object that becomes operationally down in the future is removed from
the system.
Cleanup all Discovered Links in NE Group: keeps the current checkpoint set for objects that are operationally up, but removes
checkpoints from objects that are operationally down. This is similar to the Clear Reference for All Discovered Links in NE Group
option, but only affects operationally down objects.
See Procedure 638 for more information about link referencing.

Remove From a service tier contextual menu on the composite service topology map navigation tree, the Remove option deletes the service from the
network in a composite service tier.
In a composite service, deleting a service is not the same as removing a service from a composite service. Deleting a service removes the
service from the 5620 SAM database. To avoid a service outage, be certain of the action that you are taking.
See Procedure 8312 for more information about removing a service from a composite service.

6.2 5620 SAM topology map types
This section details the types of maps available to the 5620 SAM.

Physical topology map
The physical topology map is available by choosing Application Physical Topology from the 5620 SAM main menu. The physical topology map is used to view and manage
Layer 1 objects, including the logical grouping of devices. Figure 67 shows the physical topology map.
Figure 67 Physical topology map

The physical topology map is open in the working panel by default when the 5620 SAM client GUI starts.
The following apply to link objects in the physical topology map:
The following colors indicate link status:
Red—the link has failed
Light gray—the link is in service
Green—the link is new
Blue—the link is in standby or backup mode
Dark gray—the link is unknown
Purple—the link is being diagnosed
Magenta—the link carries hidden links
Yellow—the LAG link is degraded (one or more links in the LAG have failed)
For aggregated 1+1 HSB microwave radio links on a 7705 SAR, the following colors indicate link status:
Red—the MW radio link is down
Blue—the MW radio link is up
Yellow—the MW radio link has a problem
For expanded, unidirectional 1+1 HSB microwave radio links on a 7705 SAR, the following colors indicate link status:
Red—the unidirectional radio link has a problem and the MW radio link is down
Green—the MW radio link is in service
Blue—the MW radio link is in standby mode
Yellow—the unidirectional radio link has a problem but the MW radio link is up
If endpoint B of a physical link is on an unmanaged device, the status of the physical link is the same as the status of endpoint A, which is on a 5620 SAMmanaged
device.
A LAG link is represented as a single physical link. However, if you rightclick on a LAG link, the form that opens provides information and configuration options for the
entire LAG link. For example, the Endpoint Info tab on the Discovered Physical Link form shows the link endpoints as LAG endpoints rather than physical ports, and
allows the operator to open the LAG properties form.
Note Link status colors for LAG links only apply to links discovered using LLDP. Manuallycreated LAG links, or LAG links containing manuallycreated objects,
remain green when degraded.
Contextual menu options for physical topology map background
Rightclick on the map background to open a contextual menu. See Table 62 for information about the menu options.

Service tunnel topology map
A service tunnel topology map is available on the 5620 SAM by choosing Application Service Tunnel Topology from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Service Tunnel Topology
map is displayed, as shown in Figure 68.
Figure 68 Service tunnel topology map

Icons in the service path topology map represent devices. The color of the device icon represents the status of the device. Red means that the device is down. Green means
that the device is up. Yellow means that the device is being synchronized. Purple means that the device is in a suspended management state. See chapter 11 for information
about device discovery and management states.
Link groups between devices represent service tunnels. When a link group is red, at least one tunnel in the link group is down. For link groups between managed devices, right
click the link group icon to list and edit tunnels in the link group. For link groups between managed and unmanaged devices, rightclick the link group icon to open contextual
menus and submenus which allow you to open additional information forms for the service tunnel, including the properties form.

EPS path topology maps
An EPS path topology map is available on the 5620 SAM by choosing Application EPS Path Topology from the 5620 SAM main menu. The EPS path topology map displays a
static representation of mobile network objects and EPS paths. Each network object icon represents an aggregate of all network objects of that type. For SGWs and PGWs, the
icon represents an aggregate of all instances of that gateway type and all network objects that contain instances of that type. Each EPS path link represents an aggregate of all
EPS paths of a specific type.
See the 5620 SAM LTE EPC User Guide and the 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide for information about EPS paths in LTE networks.

LSP path topology map
An LSP path topology map is available from the MPLS Path form and the LSP Path form. See Procedure 63 to view the map from the MPLS Path form. See Procedure 64 to
view the map from the LSP Path form.
The LSP path topology map is used to view a specific provisioned, actual, or CSPF LSP path in the context of its source, and transient and destination hops. Figure 69 shows
an LSP path topology map.
Figure 69 LSP path topology map

When you view the LSP path topology map, hops are linked by straight lines, where each line represents a subpath between two hops of the LSP path. The direction of each
path is indicated by an arrow. Green lines indicate provisioned paths, and gray lines indicate actual paths.

LSP crossconnect topology map
An LSP crossconnect topology map is available from the LSP Path form. To view the map from the LSP Path form, see Procedure 66.
The LSP crossconnect topology map is used to view a specific LSP crossconnect in the context of its source, and transient and destination hops. Figure 610 shows the LSP
crossconnect topology map.
Figure 610 LSP crossconnect map

Flat maps
Flat maps provide a complete network view without equipment groups. A flat topology map can display up to 1000 objects. You can narrow the range of objects that are
displayed by creating and saving filters and filter definition trees.
A flat map is available on the 5620 SAM by choosing Application Flat Maps from the 5620 SAM main menu. The following flat map types are available:
Physical Topology
Service Tunnel Topology
A flat map is used to view a large number of network objects and link groups. You can doubleclick on a NE in the flat map to display the object properties. For example, when
you doubleclick on an NE, a property form opens, from which you can view or configure the NE parameters.
Object icons in a flat map are displayed at a reduced size, link lines are thinner, and object information is not displayed. Flat maps support the following, as do other 5620 SAM
topology maps:
mousebased navigation
zooming
NE and link status colors
searching
filtering

Service topology maps
You can open a topology map for a selected service from the Manage Services form by clicking Topology View. Figure 611 shows a service topology map. Large NE icons
represent managed devices. Small NE icons represent unmanaged devices. The label of an NE icon indicates the service name and the NE IP address.
Figure 611 Service topology map


The symbol and color in the topright corner of the managed device icon represents the aggregated alarm status, which is the most severe alarm on any service that includes the
device. The symbol immediately below the aggregated alarm status and the color of the icon indicate the alarm status for the currently displayed service site. A red icon indicates
that the service site is down. A green icon indicates that the service site is up.
A port icon represents a managed access interface. A port label includes the port number and the inner and outer port encapsulation values. A service site can support up to 20
SAPs. When the number of SAPs on a service site exceeds 20, the SAPs on the site are grouped into a SAP group, represented by a SAP group icon. When the number of
SAPs drops below 20, the SAP group icon is replaced with the icons for the individual SAPs. To view the list of SAPs in a SAP group, rightclick on the SAP group icon and
choose List L2 Access Interface or List L3 Access Interface, depending on the service type. The corresponding Site form for the service opens.
SAP aggregation group icons represent SAP aggregation groups configured for a VLL Apipe on the 7705 SAR. The SAP aggregation group is linked to the service site and each
of the individual SAPs. To hide the associated SAPs for a SAP aggregation group, rightclick on the SAP aggregation group icon and choose Hide SAPs. Choose Show SAPs to
show them again.
A line between two map objects represents a link or group of links. Links between device icons represent service circuits. Links between device icons and port icons represent
the binding of an access port or interface to a service. The symbol and color in the bottom right corner of the managed device icon represents the connectivity alarm status.
During a resynchronization of the managed device, the icon represents the resynchronization status, and is yellow. The status is inherited from the link endpoints. A plus sign
icon located in the centre of the link indicates a bidirectional group link. An arrow icon located on the link indicates a unidirectional link and identifies the direction of the path.
Rightclicking on a managed site, port, or link opens a contextual menu that allows you to perform functions that include the following:
choose layout options
open an object properties form
turn up or shut down an object
create a service object
create a service object from a template, if a template is bound to the service
delete an object
open a CLI session
manage scripts
plot statistics
display or highlight service topology features
You can view multiple services on a map at the same time if the services are selected from the Manage Services form during map creation.

Service segmentation
A service segmentation view is also available to aid in conceptualizing complex services. Segments are logical grouping of interconnected sites, services, and bindings. The
segmentation view is available for VPLS and VLL services.
A service segment is considered to be a portion of a single service that extends to multiple sites connected within that segment. It is based on the service type through one of
the possible connection topologies (for example, mesh, PBB tunnels, a switching VLL, rings, and so on), without having to pass through any connectors such as spokes,
CCAGs, or SCPs (SAPtoSAP).
General examples of segments in Layer 2 service topologies include:
A simple pair or single spoke/mesh SDP binding comprises one segment
A mesh of a multiNE VPLS service comprises one segment
A multiNE mesh with a spoke SDP to a single NE comprises two segments
Each mesh of VSIs forms a segment (applicable to HVPLS)
Just a few examples of the many possible servicespecific segmentation configurations include scenarios such as the following:
HVPLS (InterMetro with redundant spoke SDPs):
One application of HVPLS is the connection of two or more geographicallydispersed VPLS domains belonging to the same customer. Two spoke SDP
connections are used to connect each VPLS between the two metros, either in a redundant PW spokes topology or under STP protocol. The redundant spokes
comprise one segment, while each VPLS will also comprise one or more segments, depending on their specific configurations.
VLL Switching:
For a VLL service at a switching router, a terminating PE device has at least one VLL SAP, while a switching PE device has a VLL instance which crossconnects
two spoke bindings. All VLL instances of such a service must have the same service ID, and if the VLL has one or more switching sites, it must have at least two
terminating sites. In this scenario, the primary and redundant spoke SDPs on the same network endpoint are considered to be in the same segment.
PBB:
In a PBB configuration, the BVPLS is considered a service tunnel, from the IVPLS or IEpipe perspective. Therefore, the sites connected via a BVPLS (that is,
having the same ISID) are considered to be in one segment.
ISites bound to the same PBB tunnel (BVPLS) and having the same ISID exist in the same segment.
Epipe sites bound to same PBB tunnel (BVPLS) exist in the same segment
Whenever you modify a service, the following actions can trigger segment creation, modification, or deletion in a segmented service view:
Adding or removing service sites
Creating or deleting spoke and/or mesh bindings (either through the 5620 SAM GUI or CLI)
Creation or deletion of VLAN Uplinks by 5620 SAM
You can access the segmented view of a service by rightclicking on an empty portion of the background in the service’s topology view. A contextual menu allows you to activate
or deactivate the segmented view for the service.
In a segmented view, the outlined links of all spoke bindings, mesh bindings, or VLAN Uplinks are colored in the same distinct way for the segment they belong to. However,
there are currently only 19 different colors available for use in showing service segments. If all the colors for a specific service are used, a warning message is logged to indicate
this.
Figure 612 shows an example of how the 5620 SAM displays the segmented view of an HVPLS MetrotoMetro service.
Figure 612 Service segmentation example

Composite service topology maps
You can use the 5620 SAM to view composite service topology and flat topology maps. Figure 613 shows a sample composite service topology map. When you open a flat
topology view map, the navigation tree is not part of the map.
Figure 613 Composite service topology map


In a composite service topology map, you can use the navigation tree at the left side to display the composite service and service tier hierarchy starting from the services object.
The map navigation tree displays the following:
composite services and service tiers, including service name and tier number
status of the composite services and their tiers
The map toolbar for the composite service topology map includes the Rearrange by Service Tiers icon. See Table 61 in this section for more information.
Doubleclick on a composite service object in the map panel to display the service objects that belong to the composite service. Doubleclick on the service objects to display
the service sites and access interfaces. The links or groups of links between the service sites and access interfaces are also displayed.
In the composite service topology map, all service objects in the composite service are displayed simultaneously. The service sites, access interfaces, and the links or groups of
links between them are also displayed. The navigation tree is thus not required in this view. Figure 614 shows a sample composite service flat topology map.
Figure 614 Composite service flat topology map

You can rightclick an object icon or link group icon to turn up, shut down, or display the properties form for the item.
You can also perform Ethernet CFM diagnostics directly from the composite service flat map.

6.3 Working with topology maps
This section details different methods of managing 5620 SAM capabilities from the topology view.

Modifying a service from the topology view
The topology view for a service provides a graphical representation of the various components and their interconnections. You can also use this view to add, modify, or just
navigate to service components. This provides an alternative approach to performing these functions from the navigation tree view in the service configuration forms.
Working from the topology view can expedite the creation of the components, since many of the fields you would ordinarily have to set in the configuration forms will be
automatically populated using this approach. The configuration forms can also be accessed directly at any time from this view by rightclicking a component. This allows quick
access to conduct more detailed component configuration.
Services that can be modified from their topology views include VPLS, VPRN, VLL, IES, and composite services. See the appropriate service management chapter for
procedures that describe how to modify services from the topology view.

Managing OAM diagnostics from the topology view
A 5620 SAM operator can configure and execute OAM diagnostic tests from the service topology or composite service flat topology view. A rightclick contextual menu of test
types and test operations allows a GUI user to perform many testmanagement tasks. The OAM diagnostic functions on the map are enabled and disabled using a selector in the
map window.
5620 SAM OAM diagnostic test management using the service topology map is supported for the following service types:
VLAN, excluding 9500 MPR VLAN
VLL Epipe
VPLS
VPRN
The 5620 SAM OAM diagnostic test management functions are also available for composite services using the composite service flat topology map.
You can use a contextual menu option to open a testcreation form for selected map objects such as NEs, SAPs, SDPs, MEPs, and MIPs. The form is automatically populated
with the information for the selected objects. After you apply the test configuration, you can use the map to execute the test and view the results. A test result summary is
viewable using statically displayed or mouseover global info tables that are shown beside the object that initiates the test. By default, the info table for a tested object displays
the five most recent test results; you can enable or disable the display of individual or all results.
The general OAM contextual menu options that are available include the following:
Create OAM Tests—lists the tests that are appropriate for the service type and selected objects; choosing a test type opens the prepopulated testcreation form
Select OAM Tests—opens a filterable list form from which you can choose previously created tests associated with one or two objects
Note The tests that are listed using the Select OAM Tests option do not include generated tests, or manually added firstrun or lastrun tests in a test suite.
See Procedure 627 for information about enabling basic OAMrelated map functions.
See Procedure 8853 for information about configuring and executing OAMETH tests on SAPs and sites for VPLS, Epipe, and Composite services.

Working with Ethernet CFM objects
You can configure and manage Ethernet CFM objects such as MEGs, MEPs, and MIPs using the Ethernet CFM contextual menu option. MEPs and MIPs are represented
iconically. For example, a SAP or SDP binding object can have a graphical connector to MEPs and MIPs, and a site object can be connected to a BVPLS MEP.
Within a MEG, MEPs can be divided into logical groupings called subgroups. A MEG which contains subgroups is called a Global MEG. When created, a Global MEG has by
default one subgroup.
A service topology map displays only one MEG at a time. The MEG is selectable using a dropdown menu in the map window when the OAM function on the map is enabled.
The CFM objects associated with the currently selected MEG are displayed.
For a MEP, the following attributes are displayed:
the MEP level, as a number inside the icon
the MEP direction, as the up or down direction in which the icon points
the MEP administrative state, as the icon color
the MEG subgroup to which the MEP belongs, as the icon outline color.
Note For composite services, MEP generation does not occur for for VLAN uplinks and overlapping service sites.
When the Show Test Options check box is enabled, the roles assigned to MEPs for Test Suite Generation are displayed beside the MEP icons. The roles are Target, Source, and
Hub or Spoke. See Procedure 627.
For a MIP, only the level is displayed.
The displayed Ethernet CFM contextual menu options for MEPs and MIPs depend on the Ethernet CFM configuration, for example, the MD level and whether MEPs and MIPs
are already in the MEG.
When an operator rightclicks on the map background, the Ethernet CFM options are:
global MEG creation, which opens a configuration form populated with the selected sites or all service sites, if none are selected.
addition of a service to an existing global MEG
delete selected global MEG
When the selected object is a SAP, you can create, view, change and delete MEPs. See Procedure 892 for information about configuring MEPs. You can enable, disable, and
view MIPs. Enabling a MIP creates a MIP only when the configuration supports this function.
When the selected object is a VLAN uplink, a solid line is displayed between the two SAPs and an OAM icon is displayed above the port icons. Rightclick on the OAM icon to
display the following Ethernet CFM options:
Edit MEP
Delete MEP
Disable MIP
Change MEG Sub Group
When the selected object is an SDP binding, you can enable, disable, and view the associated MEPs.
Note When you enable a MIP on a SAP or SDP binding, the 5620 SAM creates a MEG site if one does not exist, and uses explicit MHF creation.
6.4 Workflow to use 5620 SAM topology maps
1. Familiarize yourself with the components and basic operations of 5620 SAM maps. See sections 6.1 and 6.5.
2. Determine the map type you want to use. See section 6.2.
Select service maps to show which NEs are used by the services.
Select topology maps to show the relationship between NEs in a routing domain.
3. Configure map layout and object information tables. See section 6.6.
4. As required, create map filters to narrow the range of objects displayed. See section 6.6.
5. As required, create equipment groups and populate the groups with devices to organize the network. See section 6.7.
6. As required, create physical links between managed and unmanaged devices to configure L1 management. See section 6.7.
7. As required, create radio links between GNEs. See section 6.7.

6.5 Basic 5620 SAM topology map procedures
Use the following procedures to perform basic map management tasks.

Procedure 61 To open a map from the 5620 SAM main menu
1. Choose Application from the 5620 SAM main menu.
2. Choose a type of map to view from the menu options:
Physical Topology to view Layer 1 network connectivity
Service Tunnel Topology to view service tunnels
Flat Maps Physical Topology
Flat Maps Service Tunnel Topology
EPS Path Topology
The appropriate map opens and displays the network objects.
Refer to the following for detailed information:
Procedure 67 regarding the use of map elements
Procedure 69 to list or view object information from a map
Section 6.1 for general aspects of the map views

Procedure 62 To open a service topology map
1. Choose Manage Service Services from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Services form opens.
2. Select one or more services and click Topology View. A dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes to continue. The Service Topology map opens.
4. View and close the map.

Procedure 63 To open an MPLS provisioned path map from the MPLS Path form
1. Choose Manage MPLS MPLS Paths from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage MPLS Paths form opens.
2. Select an MPLS path and click Properties. The MPLS Path configuration form for the selected path opens.
3. Click on the Provisioned Path tab. The hops of the MPLS path are listed.
4. Select a hop and click Topology View. The MPLS provisioned path map opens showing the hops between the devices.

Procedure 64 To open a dynamic LSP path map from the LSP Path form
1. Choose Manage MPLS Dynamic LSPs from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Dynamic LSPs form opens.
2. Select a dynamic LSP and click Properties. The Dynamic LSP (Edit) form opens.
3. Click on the LSPPath Bindings tab. The LSP paths are listed.
4. Select an LSP path and click Properties. The LSPPath Binding (Edit) form opens.
a. View the topology for provisioned paths:
i. Click on the Provisioned Path tab. The LSP path hops are listed.
ii. Select a hop and click Topology View. The LSP path map opens showing the LSP path hops between the devices.
b. View the topology for actual paths:
i. Click on the Actual Path tab. The actual path hops are listed.
ii. Select a hop and click Topology View. The LSP path map opens showing the actual path hops between the devices.
c. View the topology for CSPF paths:
i. Click on the CSPF Path tab. The CSPF path hops are listed.
ii. Select a hop click Topology View. The LSP path map opens showing the CSPF path hops between the devices.

Procedure 65 To open a flat map
a. Open a flat physical topology map.
i. Choose Application Flat Maps Physical Topology from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Topology Filter Physical Topology filter form opens.
ii. Go to step 2.
b. Open a flat service tunnel topology map.
i. Choose Application Flat Maps Service Tunnel Topology from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Topology Filter Service Tunnel Topology filter form opens.
ii. Go to step 2.
a. Perform Procedure 620 to create a filter definition.
b. Perform Procedure 621 to load and apply a saved filter.

Procedure 66 To open a dynamic LSP crossconnect topology map
1. Choose Manage MPLS Dynamic LSPs from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Dynamic LSPs form opens.
2. Choose an LSP and click Properties. The Dynamic LSP (Edit) form opens.
3. Click on the Cross Connects tab. The crossconnects of the LSP path are listed.
4. Choose a crossconnect and click Topology View. The LSP path map opens and displays the crossconnects between the devices.

Procedure 67 To view and understand map elements
1. Open a map, as described in Procedures 61 to 66.
2. View the map elements, which can include the following:
Device icons. These each display one of the following background colors to represent connectivity status and SNMP reachability:
red—down or unreachable
yellow—resynchronizing or discovering
purple—management suspended
green—normal
The symbol in the topright corner of a device icon represents the most serious alarm raised against the device.
The symbol in the middle righthand side of a device icon represents the alarm status for the device.
The symbol in the bottomright corner of a device icon represents the connectivity to the device. During resynchronization, the symbol represents the
resynchronization status; for example, yellow.
Equipment group icons. These have the following characteristics:
The background color white indicates that the equipment group does not contain any descendant objects.
The color and symbol in the upperleft corner of the equipment group icon indicates the most severe alarm on any of the devices in the group.
The color of the uppermiddle section of an equipment group icon indicates the aggregated connectivity status of the devices in the group.
The color of the upperright corner of the equipment group icon indicates the aggregated link status of the links in the group.
Composite service icons. These have the following characteristics:
The color and symbol in the upperleft corner of the composite service icon indicates the most severe alarm on any of the devices in the composite service.
The color of the uppermiddle section of the composite service icon indicates the aggregated connectivity status of the devices in the composite service.
The color of the upperright corner of the composite service icon indicates the aggregated link status of the links in the composite service.
Service tier icons in composite service maps. These have the following characteristics:
The color and symbol in the upperleft corner of the composite service icon indicates the most severe alarm on any of the devices in the service.
The color of the uppermiddle section of the composite service icon indicates the aggregated connectivity status of the devices in the service.
The color of the upperright corner of the composite service icon indicates the aggregated link status of the links in the service.

Procedure 68 To save a map to a file
You can use the Save to File icon to save a portion of a map or an entire map to a JPEG, BMP or PNG file.
1. Open a map.
2. Click the Save To File icon. The save options are displayed in the dropdown menu.
3. Choose the type of view you want to save:
Choose Save Map View to save the currently displayed view.
Choose Save Full Map to save the entire map view.
The Save As form opens.
4. Save the results as follows:
i. Choose a folder for the file using the Save In dropdown menu.
ii. Specify a File Name.
iii. Select the file format from the File of Type dropdown menu.
iv. Click Save. The map view file is saved.
5. Close the map.

Procedure 69 To view object information from a map
1. Open a map.
2. Rightclick on one of the following objects:
device icon
plus sign icon in the center of a link or link group
port of a generic or unmanaged NE that indicates the endpoint of a link, path, tunnel, or service
equipment group icon
The appropriate contextual menu appears.
3. Choose a contextual menu option. The following are examples of the options available, depending on the type of object selected.
Choose Properties to open the properties form for the object.
Choose Scripts to open the properties form for an NE with the Scripts tab displayed.

Procedure 610 To manage the topology map window
The topology map panel and navigation tree panel are separated by a vertical split bar that you can use to control the display of the panels. You can change the size of, hide, or
show the panels.
1. To change the relative size of the panels, drag the vertical split bar to the left or right to control the amount of space used for the map and the navigation tree.
2. To hide the navigation tree when both panels are displayed, click the leftfacing arrow at the top of the vertical split bar. The navigation tree panel is hidden.
3. To show the navigation tree when only the map is displayed, click the rightfacing arrow at the top of the vertical split bar. The navigation tree panel is displayed.
4. To hide the map when both panels are displayed, click the rightfacing arrow at the top of the vertical split bar. The map panel is hidden.
5. To show the map when only the navigation tree is displayed, click the leftfacing arrow at the top of the vertical split bar. The map panel is displayed.

Procedure 611 To zoom in and zoom out on a map
1. Open a map.
a. Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and zoom out:
i. Click on the map.
ii. To zoom in, roll the mouse wheel forward.
iii. To zoom out, roll the mouse wheel backward.
b. Use the Zoom in Tool and Zoom out Tool:
i. Click the Zoom in Tool or Zoom out Tool icon.
ii. Move the mouse pointer into the map panel. The pointer changes to a magnifying glass containing a + or sign.
iii. Click on the area of the map you want to expand or contract. Continue clicking until the desired zoom level is reached.
iv. Use the opposite tool and an equal number of clicks to return the map to its default setting.
v. To return to the pointer icon, click the Select Tool icon in the toolbar.
c. Click on the Scale combo box dropdown arrow and choose a zoom level from the list.
d. Use the Scale combo box to specify a custom zoom level percentage, and press Enter.

Procedure 612 To display only selected map objects
1. Open a map.
2. Select the required objects.
3. Rightclick on any one of the selected objects and choose Show only Selected. The map refreshes to display only the selected objects. The word Hidden is also displayed
in the map panel to indicate that some objects are currently hidden.
4. To restore the full map view, rightclick anywhere in the map panel and choose Cancel Show Only.

Procedure 613 To display only highlighted map objects
1. Open a map.
2. Click the Legend icon in the toolbar and choose Highlight Sessions. The Legend form opens.
3. Select one or more highlight sessions in the list.
4. Rightclick on the selected highlight sessions and choose Show Only Highlighted. The map refreshes to display only the highlighted objects. The word Hidden is also
displayed in the map panel to indicate that the nonhighlighted objects are currently hidden.
5. To restore the full map view, rightclick anywhere in the map panel and choose Cancel Show Only.
Note You can also restore the previous map view by rightclicking on the selected highlight sessions in the Legend form and choosing Cancel Show Only.

6.6 5620 SAM topology map configuration procedures
Use the following procedures to perform map configuration tasks.

Procedure 614 To create an information table configuration
You can create an information table configuration for all map objects, selected map objects, or map highlights. See Procedure 615 to apply a configuration to all map objects.
See Procedure 616 to apply a configuration to selected map objects. See Procedure 617 to apply a configuration to highlighted map objects.
1. Open a map.
2. Click the Global Info Tables icon. A dropdown menu opens with the information table configurations displayed.
3. Select the Configure menu item. The topology_view Info Table Configurations form opens.
4. Click Create. The topology_view Info Table Configuration form opens.
5. Configure the Configuration Name parameter.
6. For each map object type, click on the associated check box to select the attribute for display in the information table.
Note If an applicable attribute is not selected for a specific object type, an information table is not displayed when you apply an information table
configuration to objects of that type.
7. Click OK. The topology_view Info Table Configuration form closes, and the new configuration is listed on the topology_view Info Table Configurations form.
8. Close the topology_view Info Table Configurations form.

Procedure 615 To enable or disable a global information table
The Global Info Tables icon allows you to view an information table for all map objects. An information table configuration must be created before it can be applied. See
Procedure 614 for information about creating an information table configuration.
1. Open a map.
2. Click the Global Info Tables icon. A dropdown menu opens with the information table configurations displayed.
a. Select a radio button to apply an existing global information table configuration. The map is refreshed with the corresponding information table displayed beside the
map objects.
b. Click Off. The global information table feature is disabled.

Procedure 616 To enable or disable a selected information table
The Selected Info Tables menu option allows you to view an information table for a map object, or a group of map objects. An information table configuration must be created
before it can be applied to a map object or a group of map objects. See Procedure 614 for information about creating an information table configuration.
1. Open a map.
2. Rightclick on a map object or a selection of map objects. A drop down menu opens.
3. Choose Selected Info Tables. A drop down menu opens with a list of information table configurations and an Off option.
a. Choose an information table configuration. The map view is refreshed with the configured information table displayed beside the map objects.
b. Choose the Off option. The selected information tables for the selected map objects are no longer displayed.

Procedure 617 To reenable or disable map highlights
1. Open the required map.
a. Reenable a disabled highlight. Perform the following steps.
i. Select the check box in the Active column for the highlight.
ii. Click Apply. The map view is refreshed with the highlight displayed.
b. Disable the highlight. Perform the following steps.
i. Deselect the check box in the Active column for the highlight.
ii. Click Apply. The map view is refreshed. The highlight and the associated information tables are no longer displayed.
4. Click Close. The Legend topology form closes.

Procedure 618 To enable or disable a highlight information table
You must create an information table configuration before you can apply the configuration to a map highlight. See Procedure 614 for information about creating an information
table configuration.
1. Open the required map.
3. Select one or more highlight sessions in the list.
4. Rightclick on the selected highlight sessions and choose Highlighted Info Sessions. A dropdown menu opens with a list of information table configurations and an Off
option.
a. Choose an information table configuration. The map view is refreshed with the specified information table displayed beside the highlighted map objects.
b. Choose the Off option. The map view is refreshed and does not display information tables for the highlighted map objects.
Note When a highlight is disabled or deleted, the map does not display the information tables that are associated with the highlight.

Procedure 619 To delete a map highlight
1. Open a map.
3. Click on a map highlight to select it.
4. Rightclick on the selected highlight and choose Delete. A dialog box appears.
5. Click Yes. The highlight is deleted.

Procedure 620 To create a map filter
Perform this procedure to configure a filter to restrict the objects in a map view. You can save the filter for searches on similar objects.
1. Open a map.
2. Click the Filter icon. The Topology Filter topology_view form opens.
3. Choose an object filter from the Object Filter dropdown menu. Table 63 lists the filter options for each map type.
Table 63 Map filter options
Type of map Filter options

Physical topology Discovered Physical Link

Network Element
Optical Link
Physical Link

Service tunnel topology Network Element

Tunnel

4. Click the Add Object Filter icon. The selected object filter is displayed in the filter panel as shown in Figure 615.
Figure 615 Map filter
5. Choose one or more of the object filters to create the filter. See chapter 3 for information about creating filters.
6. Configure the Span parameter.
a. Click Apply to apply the filter and not save the filter. The map view is refreshed to display only the map objects defined in the filter. The filter selector displays Filter
Applied.
b. Perform the following steps to save the filter.
i. Click Save. The Save Filter form opens.
ii. Configure the required parameters:
Filter Name
Description
Public
8. Click Save. The Save Filter form closes.
9. Close the Topology Filter topology_view form.

Procedure 621 To load and apply a saved filter to a topology map
See Procedure 620 for information about creating a filter definition tree.
1. Open a map.
2. Click on the saved filter selector and choose a filter.
The 5620 SAM applies the filter and the map view is refreshed to display only the map objects specified in the filter. The filter name is displayed in the saved filter
selector.

Procedure 622 To autolayout icons on a map
Caution After you click the AutoLayout icon and confirm the action, the existing map layout is overwritten and cannot be recovered.
1. Open a map.
a. Autolayout all of the icons on the map.
i. Click the AutoLayout Tool icon and choose one of the following options:
Circular emphasizes ring and star topologies in networks. Objects are grouped according to the network structure and arranged in circles or radial
tree structures.
Smart Organic emphasizes inherent data groupings and symmetries. This information helps with understanding the interconnections of complex
structures.
Endpoint Layout (VPLS, VLL, mirror, and composite service sites only) all endpoints are snapped close to the associated parent site.
A dialog box appears.
ii. Click Yes.
b. Autolayout a group of icons on the map.
i. Select multiple objects.
ii. Rightclick on an object in the group, choose Layout Selected, and choose one of the following options:
Circular
Smart Organic
Endpoint Layout (VPLS, VLL, mirror, and composite service sites only)
A dialog box appears.
iii. Click Yes.
The map layout changes so that icons with links between them are closer together, and icons without links between them are moved to the periphery.

Procedure 623 To search for a specific network object
1. Open a map.
a. To search for a network object by typing the name, or part of the name of the network object:
i. Click the Find icon in the map toolbar.
ii. Choose Find Vertex or Find Link. The Find object form opens.
iii. Configure the filter criteria and click Search. A list of objects is displayed.
Note The search function is case sensitive.
iv. Select an object in the list.
b. To search for a network object by pasting the name of the network object from the clipboard:
i. Click on the network object that you want to locate from the equipment view of the navigation tree or from a generated or displayed list.
ii. Click the Copy to Clipboard icon to copy the network object name to the clipboard.
iii. Click the Find icon.
iv. Choose Find Vertex or Find Link. The Find Object form opens.
v. Click the Paste button. The network object that you copied to the clipboard is displayed in the Find object with label containing text field.
Note Only the first item listed on the clipboard is pasted in the Find object with label containing text field of the Find Object form.
c. Use the Quicksearch field on the map window. Perform the following steps.
i. Type part or all of the object name in the Quicksearch field beside the toolbar icons.
ii. Press . The map shifts to display the first object that matches the search criterion.
iii. Press F3 to shift the map focus to the next matching object, if the search finds multiple matches.
iv. Press CTRLF3 to shift the map focus to the previous matching object, if the search finds multiple matches.
v. Go to step 5.
3. Click OK.
a. If a match is found, the map panel displays the equipment group that contains the object and the map navigation tree expands to display the group. If necessary,
the map panel scrolls to the portion of the map where the object is displayed.
b. If multiple matches are found, the Find Object form opens with a dropdown menu of all of the search results. Go to step 4.
4. Select a network object and click OK. The map panel displays the equipment group that contains the object and the map navigation tree expands to display the group. If
necessary, the map panel scrolls to the portion of the map where the object is displayed.
5. Manage the object, as required.

Procedure 624 To create a bookmark
See section 6.1 for information about the bookmark function.
1. Open a map.
2. Locate the equipment group that you want to bookmark.
Note Bookmarks are associated with a map view. To use the bookmark after it is created, you must be in the same view where you created the bookmark
or a view that shares the same group, for example, an equipment group that belongs to both the physical topology map and the service tunnel map.
3. Click the Bookmarks icon and choose Add Bookmark. A bookmark for the currently displayed equipment group is created.

Procedure 625 To manage bookmarks
See section 6.1 for information about the bookmark function.
Note Bookmarks are associated with a map view. To use the bookmark after it is created, you must be in the same view where you created the bookmark
or a view that shares the same group, for example, an equipment group that belongs to both the physical topology map and the service tunnel map.
Bookmarks that were not created in the map view currently displayed, or that are invalid, are disabled and cannot be selected. In the Manage Bookmarks
form, these bookmarks appear in italics.
2. Click the Bookmarks icon and choose Manage Bookmarks. The Manage Bookmarks form opens.
a. Create a toplevel folder to manage the bookmarks.
i. Click New Folder. The Folder Properties form opens.
ii. Enter the name of the new folder in the Name field and click OK. A new toplevel folder is added to the list panel.
b. Create a folder in an existing folder.
i. Select an existing folder in the list panel and click New Folder. The Folder Properties form opens.
ii. Enter the name of the new folder in the Name field and click OK. A new folder is added to the list panel inside the existing folder.
c. Organize your bookmarks and folders. Drag and drop bookmarks and folders in and out of other folders in the list panel.
d. Rename a bookmark or folder.
i. Select an existing bookmark or folder in the list panel and click Rename. The Rename form opens with the existing name in the Name field.
ii. Change the text in the Name field and click OK. The name of the bookmark or folder is modified.
e. Delete a bookmark or folder.
i. Select a bookmark or folder that you want to delete in the list panel.
ii. Click Delete. The selected bookmark or folder is removed from the list panel and the bookmark dropdown menu on the map toolbar.
4. Click Close to close the Manage Bookmarks form and save the changes.

Procedure 626 To change the map background image
To view the map background image examples provided by the 5620 SAM, navigate to the background directory in the 5620 SAM client Installation directory, for example,
/nms/images/map/background.
When adding your own map image to the directory, ensure that the file type is GIF and that the size is a maximum of 2000 × 2000 pixels.
The default background image is defaultBackgroundImage.gif.
2. In the map navigation tree, rightclick on the equipment group for which you need to change the map background image, and choose Properties. The Group Network
(Edit) form opens.
3. Select an image file. You can only select the images from the default maps directory.
4. Save your changes and close the form. The background image for the equipment group changes to the selected image.

6.7 5620 SAM topology map management procedures
Use the following procedures to perform map management tasks.

Procedure 627 To use OAM diagnostic functions on service topology and composite service flat topology maps
Perform this procedure to enable the OAM diagnostic functions on a service topology or composite service flat topology map, and use the basic OAM controls in the map
window. See the other procedures in this chapter for information about using specific elements such as the toolbar icons and info tables.
1. Create a service topology map by selecting the service in the Manage Services form and clicking Topology View.
2. Select the OAM check box at the bottom left of the map window.
3. To manage one or more objects, select the objects and rightclick on the set of objects to choose an option.
4. To select a MEG to display, choose the MEG from the dropdown menu of available MEGs at the bottom of the map window.
Note You can also create a MEG directly from the topology map by rightclicking on an empty portion of the map to open a contextual menu. Select
Ethernet CFM Create Global MEG.
5. To view the properties of the selected MEG, click MEG Properties at the bottom of the window. The Global Maintenance Entity Group (Edit) form opens. The service
displayed on the map is listed on the Service tab.
6. To resynchronize the MIPs in the selected MEG, click Resync MIPs at the bottom of the window.
7. To display the Test Generation Options for MEPs in the selected MEG, enable the Show Test Options check box at the bottom of the map window. See "Working with
Ethernet CFM objects" in section 6.3.
8. Use the other procedures in this chapter to refine the map contents or display object properties, as required.
9. Use the rightclick contextual menu options to configure and manage OAM objects, as required. See "Managing OAM diagnostics from the topology view" in section 6.1
for a functional description of the available contextual menu options for OAM diagnostics.
10. See Procedure 8853 for information about configuring and executing OAMETH tests on SAPs and sites for VPLS, Epipe, and Composite services.

Procedure 628 To create an equipment group
1. Open the Group (Create) form using one of the following methods.
a. Choose Create Equipment Group from the 5620 SAM main menu.
b. Rightclick on the map background and choose Equipment Create Group.
c. In the map navigation tree, rightclick on the Network icon or an existing group icon and choose Equipment Create Group.
d. In the Navigation Tree window, rightclick on the Network icon or an existing group icon and choose Create Group. The view selector must be set to Equipment,
Routing, or Wireless Logical RAN.
3. Click Apply to save your changes.
4. Click on the Spans tab.
5. Click Add and choose one or more spans to apply to the equipment group.
6. Click OK to close the form and save your changes. The navigation trees and appropriate topology maps display an icon for the equipment group.

Procedure 629 To populate an equipment group
1. Choose Application Physical Topology, or Service Tunnel Topology from the 5620 SAM main menu. The appropriate map window opens.
2. Click on an NE object in the map panel or map navigation tree and drag the object onto an equipment group object in the map panel or map navigation tree. The object is
added to the equipment group.
Alternatively, to populate or reconfigure groups you can click and drag NE objects in the Navigation Tree window, move NEs using the Move to Group button on NEs list
forms, or drag and drop from the Discovered NEs or Unmanaged NEs list.
Note An equipment group can contain up to 2000 NEs. However, the 5620 SAM client can display a maximum of 500 NEs on the topology map. See
Procedure 632 for information about managing the display of NEs in equipment groups on the map.

Procedure 630 To create a copy of an equipment group
1. Rightclick on an equipment group object and choose Properties. The Group (Edit) form opens.
2. Click Copy. The Group (Create) form opens.
3. Configure the parameters, as required.
4. Click OK to save your changes and close the Group (Create) form.
5. Close the Group (Edit) form.

Procedure 631 To delete an equipment group
Note You can delete an equipment group only if the equipment group is empty.
1. Open the map window that contains the equipment group. Choose Application Physical Topology, or Application Service Tunnel Topology from the 5620 SAM main

menu. The map window opens.
2. Empty the equipment group. Perform any of the following:
a. Drag and drop all objects in the equipment group into other equipment groups or into the network.
i. Doubleclick on the equipment group icon on the map, or select the equipment group in the map navigation tree. The map displays the NEs in the group.
Note An equipment group can contain up to 2000 NEs. However, the 5620 SAM client can display a maximum of 500 NEs on the topology
map. When an equipment group contains more than 500 NEs, map display for the equipment group is not available.
Unmanaged NEs count toward the maximum number of 500 NEs that can be displayed per group on the map.
ii. Click the NE icons on the map and drag to equipment group objects or the network object in the map navigation tree.
You can use the CTRL key to select multiple NE icons, or click on the map background and press CTRLA to select all NEs in the group.
b. Use the NEs List form.
Note Use this method when there are more than 500 NEs in the equipment group, and the map is not available for the group.
i. Rightclick on the equipment group object on the map or in the map navigation tree or navigation tree window and choose List NEs.
ii. Select NEs in the list and click Move to Group. A dropdown menu opens.
iii. Choose an equipment group in the menu. The selected NEs are moved to the selected group.
c. Use the Unmanaged NEs list form.
i. Rightclick on the equipment group object on the map or in the map navigation tree or navigation tree window and choose List Unmanaged NEs. A list form
opens, with a list of the unmanaged NEs in the group.
ii. Select the unmanaged NEs in the list and click and drag to another group on the map or in the map navigation tree.
3. Rightclick on the equipment group object in the map navigation tree or on the map and choose Delete. A dialog box appears.
Alternatively, when the equipment group is displayed on the map you can rightclick on the map background and choose Delete from the contextual menu.
4. Click Yes to confirm. The equipment group is deleted.

Procedure 632 To manage NEs in equipment groups on the map
Perform this procedure to open a list form of the NEs in an equipment group. The list form allows you to access and manage NEs, and to move NEs between groups. You can
open a separate list form for unmanaged NEs in the group.
An equipment group can contain up to 2000 NEs. However, the 5620 SAM client can display a maximum of 500 NEs on the topology map. When an equipment group contains
more than 500 NEs, map display for the equipment group is not available. You can use the NEs list form to access all of the NEs in the group, and to move NEs to other groups.
1. Open the Physical Topology map window. Choose Application Physical Topology from the 5620 SAM main menu. The map window opens.
2. Open a list form for the NEs in the equipment group. Rightclick on an equipment group icon on the map or in the map navigation tree and perform any of the following:
a. Choose List NEs. A list form opens, with a list of the NEs in the group.
Manage the NEs using the action buttons, or by opening the properties form for the NE.
You can move NEs to other groups. Select one or more NEs in the list and click Move to Group, then choose an equipment group from the dropdown menu. The
selected NEs are moved to the selected group.
b. Move unmanaged NEs to other groups.
i. Choose List Unmanaged NEs. A list form opens, with a list of the unmanaged NEs in the group.
ii. Select one or more unmanaged NEs in the list and click and drag to another group on the map or in the map navigation tree.
Create a new group if required; see Procedure 628.
Unmanaged NEs count toward the maximum number of 500 NEs that can be displayed per group on the map.
3. Close the list form.

Procedure 633 To modify a service from the topology view
1. Perform one of the following to open a service topology view.
a. Choose Manage Service Services from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Services form opens.
b. Choose Manage Service Composite Services from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Composite Services form opens.

2. Click Search to list the services or composite services.
a. Select a service and click Topology View. The Service Topology map opens.
b. Select a composite service and click Flat Topology View. The Composite Service Flat Topology View map opens.
4. Rightclick on the map background, or on one or more selected service sites or components and choose an option. A configuration form opens.
5. See the appropriate service management chapter for information about modifying a specific service type, or Chapter 88 for information about configuring OAM diagnostic
tests.

Procedure 634 To create a physical link
An operator with Device Mgmt privileges can create, modify, and delete physical links.
Note 1 Each physical link endpoint must terminate on the same type of MDA.
Note 2 You can configure only one physical link endpoint on a port.
1. Choose Create Equipment Physical Link from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Physical Link (Create) form opens.

Alternatively, you can rightclick on the map background and choose Equipment Create Physical Link.
3. Perform one of the following to configure the Endpoint A parameters.
a. If you set the Endpoint A Type parameter in step 2 to Port, go to step 4.
b. If you set the Endpoint A Type parameter in step 2 to Network Element, go to step 5.
c. If you set the Endpoint A Type parameter in step 2 to LAG, go to step 6.
4. Configure the required parameters in the Endpoint A Port panel by performing one of the following steps.
a. Click Select to choose a port as an endpoint.
b. Choose a port from the equipment navigation tree. Perform the following steps.
i. Select a port and click the Copy to Clipboard icon. The port information is copied to the clipboard.
ii. Click Paste from Clipboard in the Endpoint A Port panel of the Physical Link (Create) form.
5. Configure the required parameters in the Endpoint A Network Element panel by performing one of the following steps.
a. Click Select to choose a managed NE as an endpoint.
b. Choose an NE from the equipment navigation tree. Perform the following steps.
i. Select an NE and click the Copy to Clipboard icon. The NE information is copied to the clipboard.
ii. Click Paste from Clipboard in the Endpoint A Network Element panel of the Physical Link (Create) form.
6. Configure the required parameters in the Endpoint A LAG panel by performing one of the following steps.
a. Click Select to choose a LAG as an endpoint.
b. Choose a LAG from the equipment navigation tree. Perform the following steps.
i. Select a LAG and click the Copy to Clipboard icon. The LAG information is copied to the clipboard.
ii. Click Paste from Clipboard in the Endpoint A LAG panel of the Physical Link (Create) form.
7. Perform one of the following to configure the Endpoint B parameters.
a. If you set the Endpoint B Type parameter in step 2 to Port, go to step 8.
b. If you set the Endpoint B Type parameter in step 2 to Network Element, go to step 9.
c. If you set the Endpoint B Type parameter in step 2 to Unmanaged NE, go to step 11.
d. If you set the Endpoint B Type parameter in step 2 to LAG, go to step 12.
8. Configure the required parameters in the Endpoint B Port panel by performing one of the following steps.
a. Click Select to choose a port as an endpoint.
b. Choose a port from the equipment navigation tree. Perform the following steps.
i. Select a port and click the Copy to Clipboard icon. The port information is copied to the clipboard.
ii. Click Paste from Clipboard in the Endpoint B Port panel of the Physical Link (Create) form.
9. Configure the required parameters in the Endpoint B Network Element panel by performing one of the following steps.
a. Click Select to choose a managed NE as an endpoint.
b. Choose an NE from the equipment navigation tree. Perform the following steps.
i. Select an NE and click the Copy to Clipboard icon. The NE information is copied to the clipboard.
ii. Click Paste from Clipboard in the Endpoint B Network Element panel of the Physical Link (Create) form.
10. If the Endpoint B is an unmanaged NE that the 5620 SAM recognizes as an unmanaged mobile NE such as an eNodeB, go to step 14.
11. Configure the required parameters in the Endpoint B Unmanaged NE panel.
Note If the 5620 SAM is to manage endpoint B, configure the Unmanaged Name parameter with the management IP address of the unmanaged NE.
When the 5620 SAM discovers the NE, the unmanaged endpoint of the physical link is displayed as the newly managed NE on the topology map.
12. Configure the required parameters in the Endpoint B LAG panel by performing one of the following steps.
a. Click Select to choose a LAG as an endpoint.
b. Choose a LAG from the equipment navigation tree. Perform the following steps.
i. Select a LAG and click the Copy to Clipboard icon. The LAG information is copied to the clipboard.
ii. Click Paste from Clipboard in the Endpoint B LAG panel of the Physical Link (Create) form.
13. Go to step 15.
14. Click Select in the Endpoint B Unmanaged NE (LTE) panel to choose an unmanaged mobile NE such as an eNodeB.
15. Click OK to save your changes and close the form. The physical link is created between the two endpoints and is displayed in the physical topology map.

Procedure 635 To create a radio link
Perform this procedure to create a radio link between NEs in the topology map. You can create a link between a GNE radio interface and a managed port that has radio
properties, or between two GNE radio interfaces.
You can monitor a GNE radio link endpoint when the associated GNE profile includes the appropriate GNE driver. See Section 10.2 for information about using GNE profiles and
drivers.
1. Choose Create Equipment Radio Link from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Radio Link (Create) form opens.
Alternatively, you can rightclick on the map background and choose Equipment Create Radio Link.
3. Use the Select buttons to choose the Endpoint A and Endpoint B objects.
4. Save your changes and close the Radio Link (Create) form.

Procedure 636 To create a copy of a physical link
1. Choose Manage Equipment Equipment from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Equipment form opens.
2. Choose Physical Link.
3. Click Search to choose a physical link and click Properties. The Physical Link (Edit) form opens.
4. Click Copy. The Physical Link (Create) form opens.
5. Configure the parameters, as required.
6. Save your changes and close the Physical Link (Create) form. The new physical link is displayed on the physical topology map.

Procedure 637 To manage bandwidth availability on physical links
Perform this procedure to manage the bandwidth on links that are used by service CAC. See “To configure 5620 SAM system preferences” in the 5620 SAM System
Administrator Guide for information about configuring service CAC.
a. Choose Discovered Physical Link.
b. Choose Physical Link.
3. Click Search to choose a physical link and click Properties. The Physical Link (Edit) form opens.
4. Click on the Bandwidth tab.
5. To view a summary of bandwidth usage for all tunnels and services that currently use the physical link, click on the Bandwidth Usage tab.
6. Click on the Endpoint A or Endpoint B tab.
8. Click OK to save your changes and close the Physical Link (Edit) form.
9. Close the Manage Equipment form.

Procedure 638 To manage link referencing
Note You can also manage link references using the Discovered Link Property form for one link, and the Manage Equipment form. See Procedure 640.
1. Select one or more links in the topology map.
2. Hold down the shift key and rightclick on the topology map background in the equipment view of the navigation tree, choose Reference, and then one of the following
options.
Note If no links are selected, the following options are available and apply to links in the open or active equipment group:
Reference All Discovered Links in NE Group
Clear Reference for All Discovered Links in NE Group
Cleanup All Discovered Links in NE Group
a. To reference the links that you have chosen, choose Reference Selected Discovered Links.
b. To clear the reference, choose Clear Reference for All Selected Links.
c. To remove the reference for links that are down, choose Cleanup Selected Discovered Links.

Procedure 639 To delete a physical link
Note When a NE is unmanaged or removed, all the physical links that terminate on the NE are deleted.
2. Choose Physical Link.
3. Click Search and select a physical link.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click Yes. The physical link is deleted.

Procedure 640 To view and modify a discovered physical link
2. Choose Discovered Physical Link.
3. Click Search to select a discovered physical link and click Properties. The Discovered Physical Link (Edit) form opens.
5. Perform one of the following to configure the link references, if required.
a. Click Reference Discovered Links. The Reference panel displays the reference information.
b. Click Clear Reference. The parameters in the Reference panel are reset.
6. Click OK to save your changes and close the form. The Discovered Physical Link (Edit) form closes.
7. Close the Manage Equipment form.
7. 7 — 5620 SAMbased schedules
7.1 5620 SAMbased schedules overview
7.2 Workflow to create and manage 5620 SAMbased schedules
7.3 5620 SAMbased schedule procedures

7.1 5620 SAMbased schedules overview
You can create a 5620 SAMbased schedule for the automatic execution of tasks at a designated time as a onetime event or as an ongoing task. You can optionally specify the
time at which an ongoing schedule is to stop functioning.
You can use 5620 SAMbased schedules for the following:
STM test suites; see chapter 87
NE configuration backups; see chapter 24
NE checkpoint file creation and configuration rollbacks; see chapter 25
NE software upgrades; see chapter 27
RCA service audits; see chapter 93
policy audits; see chapter 48
path optimization tasks; see chapter 32
scripting tasks; see “Script management overview” in the 5620 SAM Scripts and Templates Developer Guide
call trace tasks; see “Call trace overview” in the 5620 SAM LTE RAN User Guide
A task such as running an STM test suite can be immediately processed, scheduled for later execution, or retained for future use. A task that is associated with a schedule is
called a scheduled task. A schedule task must be created in the configuration form for the task. For example an STM test suite scheduled task must be created in the STM test
suite configuration form. After scheduled tasks are created they are associated with a schedule.

Time zones and time stamps
To simplify creating 5620 SAMbased schedules when the user and server are in different time zones, the 5620 SAM converts and displays schedule times specific to the user
and server. For example, if a client user in Chicago wants to schedule a task on a server that is in New York, the 5620 SAM calculates the time difference and displays the local
client and server times.
User time zones are configured in the user preferences form. If a time zone is not configured on the main server, the 5620 SAM uses the default time zone on the singleuser
client or client delegate server station, If the default time zone is not one of the 5620 SAM time zone options, the 5620 SAM displays the time zone ID and uses the UTC value
without the time zone offset.
5620 SAM displays whether daylight saving time is in effect for the client and the server. Daylight saving time is specified for the user start time and is based on the client time
zone. Daylight saving time does not specify the current time and end time.
For scheduled OAM tests, the timeCaptured attribute in a specific result is a time stamp inserted by 5620 SAM at the time that the test result is processed (accounting file
transfer time plus test processing time). The date stamp is taken from the 5620 SAM server clock, with a resolution of milliseconds.
The scheduledTime attribute is a time stamp inserted by a managed NE, and corresponds to the accounting policy configuration on that NE. The current (or most recent) test
result for each test is written to the accounting file with this time stamp. The actual timing is derived from the NE’s clock. An accounting file can contain multiple test results for
one such time stamp. The actual number of test results depends on the file policy rollover and accounting policy collection interval.
Figure 71 shows the Schedule management form and the SAM Schedule configuration form.
Figure 71 Schedule management and configuration forms

5620 SAMbased schedules
A 5620 SAMbased schedule is only retained in the 5620 SAM db and is not deployed to the target NEs. When a configured schedule run time arrives, the 5620 SAM executes
the associated task and compiles the task results for presentation to 5620 SAM clients.
A delay time for executing 5620 SAMbased scheduled runs can be configured to delay the execution of a run within a scheduled task in cases when a previously scheduled run
is still executing. The 5620 SAM attempts to execute the new run at the configured delay time; if the run cannot execute at the delay time, the 5620 SAM skips the scheduled
run. When a previous run completes and the next scheduled run is triggered, the run executes and is not delayed, whether a delay time is configured.
The 5620 SAMbased schedule functionality uses the 5620 SAM server time zone to trigger the scheduled tasks.

5620 SAMbased schedules design considerations
Consider the following when you create a 5620 SAMbased schedule or add a scheduled task.
Ensure that scheduled tasks are run sufficiently far apart to allow one task to finish before the next starts. Otherwise, the next occurrence of the task is skipped or
delayed, if the delay time is configured.
Do not create schedules that overlap, because no validation is performed to ensure that a newly configured schedule does not overlap with an existing schedule.
A new scheduled task is shut down by default and must be turned up before it can be executed with one exception. Scheduled software upgrade tasks associated with all
NE types are autoenabled by default.
Users with write access permissions to a specific schedule package can view or delete all the created schedules and scheduled tasks related to the package. Other users
can only view schedules. See “5620 SAM user security” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide for more information about user permissions.
By default, the 5620 SAM associates a scheduled task with the user account that is used to create the scheduled task. You can assign a different user account to a
scheduled task. The user account must have the assigned scope of command role that is appropriate for the task, or the 5620 SAM does not execute the scheduled task.
5620 SAMbased schedules are not distributed to the target NEs.
You cannot delete a schedule that has a dependency, for example, one that is associated with a task. You must first delete the scheduled task from the schedule, then
delete the schedule.
One minute is added to the default start and end time values of a 5620 SAMbased schedule to allow time for schedule configuration.
A monthly 5620 SAMbased schedule with the Run Every Month or Run Every Months parameter configured uses a 30day interval.
When you create a monthly 5620 SAMbased schedule using the Run Every parameter and specify a date that does not exist for the specified months, the last date of the
month is used. For example, if you create a monthly scheduled task, starting January 31st, the scheduled task will run on February 28th, March 31st and April 30th when
those months are specified in the schedule.

7.2 Workflow to create and manage 5620 SAMbased schedules
1. Create a task that uses the 5620 SAMbased scheduling function, such as an STM test suite. See "5620 SAMbased schedules overview" in this chapter for information
about which tasks can use 5620 SAMbased schedules.
2. Create or modify a schedule; see Procedure 71.
3. Associate a task with the 5620 SAMbased schedule; see Procedure 72.
4. As required, view the scheduled tasks associated with a 5620 SAMbased schedule; see Procedure 73.
5. For a scheduled task that requires user account privileges other than the default privileges, assign a different user account to the scheduled task; see Procedure 74.
6. Turn up the scheduled task to put the schedule into a state that will execute according to the schedule; see Procedure 75. You can also use this procedure to prevent a
scheduled task from executing.
7. If required, execute the scheduled task immediately; see Procedure 76.

7.3 5620 SAMbased schedule procedures
Use the following procedures to create and manage 5620 SAMbased schedules and to assign tasks to the schedules.

Procedure 71 To configure a 5620 SAMbased schedule
As required, review the "5620 SAMbased schedules design considerations" information in this chapter before starting this procedure.
1. Choose Tools Schedules Schedule from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Schedule form opens.
2. Click Create or choose an existing schedule and click Properties. The SAM Schedule (Create|Edit) form opens.
Note 1 You can modify a schedule only when you are logged in as the user account that is assigned to the schedule. To assign a different user account to
the schedule, perform Procedure 74.
Note 2 You cannot modify a schedule that is in use by a scheduled task.
3. Configure the required SAM Schedule parameters.
Note 1 If you are creating a schedule to apply to policy audits, the Frequency parameter must be set to a value greater than 15 minutes.
Note 2 When a 5620 SAMbased schedule is not Ongoing and is assigned to a task, the 5620 SAM raises an alarm when the Current Client End Time
expires.

Procedure 72 To associate a task with a 5620 SAMbased schedule
In this procedure, an STM test suite is used to illustrate the required steps to associate a task with a 5620 SAMbased schedule.
1. Open the properties form for a task that uses a 5620 SAMbased schedule. For example, perform Procedure 874 to open the properties form associated with an STM test
suite.
2. Click Schedule. The task_name Schedule Task (Create) form opens.
Caution Setting the Administrative State parameter to Enabled puts the scheduled task into effect according to the schedule parameters. Ensure that the
test suite and the objects to which it applies are appropriately configured before you set the parameter to Enabled.
4. Select a schedule in the Schedule panel.
Note The form lists only the schedules that are associated with the current 5620 SAM user.

Procedure 73 To view scheduled tasks associated with a 5620 SAMbased schedule
1. Choose Tools Schedules Schedule from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Schedule form opens.
2. Click Search and select a 5620 SAMbased schedule in the list and click Properties. The SAM Schedule (Edit) form opens.
3. Click on the Tasks tab. A list of scheduled tasks associated with a 5620 SAMbased schedule is displayed.
4. Select a task and click Properties to view or change the scheduled task associated with the 5620 SAMbased schedule.

Procedure 74 To assign a different user account to a 5620 SAMbased scheduled task
Note 1 By default, the 5620 SAM associates a scheduled task with the user account that is active when the scheduled task is created.
Note 2 The 5620 SAM does not execute a scheduled task unless the scheduled task is associated with a 5620 SAM user account. If you delete the user account
that is associated with a scheduled task, you must assign a different user account to the scheduled task. Only a 5620 SAM user with an assigned administrator
scope of command role can assign a user account to a scheduled task.
1. Choose Tools Schedules Scheduled Task from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Scheduled Task list form opens.
2. Select a scheduled task and click Reassign User. A message indicates that the new user must have the appropriate access permissions to manage the scheduled task.
See “5620 SAM user security” in the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide for information about scope of command roles and access permissions.
3. Click OK. The Select User form opens.
4. Select the user account that you want to reassign to the 5620 SAMbased scheduled task and click OK.
5. Close the form.

Procedure 75 To turn up or shut down a 5620 SAMbased scheduled task
Note A new 5620 SAMbased scheduled task is shut down by default and must be turned up before it can be executed at the designated time. However,
scheduled software upgrade tasks associated with all NE types are autoenabled by default.
1. Choose Tools Schedules Scheduled Task from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Scheduled Task form opens.
2. Select a task entry and click Task Action.
a. Turn Up—enable the scheduled task. The administrative state changes to enabled.
b. Shut Down—disable the scheduled task. The administrative state changes to disabled. The Shut Down option is enabled after the 5620 SAMbased scheduled task
has been turned up.
4. Close the form.

Procedure 76 To immediately execute a 5620 SAMbased scheduled task
1. Turn up the 5620 SAMbased scheduled task, as described in Procedure 75.
4. Choose Execute from the menu that appears. The 5620 SAM executes the 5620 SAMbased scheduled task.
5. Close the form.
6. Perform Procedure 77 to view the scheduled task execution status, if required.

Procedure 77 To view the current status of a 5620 SAMbased scheduled task
3. Choose View Result. The Execution Status indicator displays the current execution status of a 5620 SAMbased scheduled task for example, In Progress, Succeeded, or
Failed.
4. Close the form.

Procedure 78 To modify a scheduled task on a 5620 SAM schedule
Note You can modify a scheduled task only when you are logged in as the user who is assigned to the scheduled task. To assign a different user account to the
scheduled task, perform Procedure 74.
2. Select a scheduled task and click Properties. The Scheduled task (Edit) form opens.
3. Modify the parameters, as required.
4. Click OK. The SAM Scheduled Task (Edit) form closes and the Scheduled Task form reappears.
5. Close the form.
8. 8 — 5620 SAM applications
8.1 5620 SAM applications overview
8.2 5620 SAM applications
8.3 Procedures to manage 5620 SAM applications

8.1 5620 SAM applications overview
The 5620 SAM also provides network management functions using browserbased web applications. The use of the 5620 SAM applications is intended mainly for network fault
monitoring and troubleshooting purposes. The applications are external to the 5620 SAM client GUI and do not require a local client installation.

Browser connections
The 5620 SAM applications are supported on the latest version of Mozilla Firefox and Google Chrome, and the latest release of Internet Explorer. There can be up to 50
concurrent application sessions.
You can use the following URLs to access the dashboard, from which you can launch all supported applications.
For a nonsecured connection:
http://server
where
server is the hostname or IP address of a 5620 SAM active or standby main server
For a secured connection:
https://server
where
server is the hostname or IP address of a 5620 SAM active or standby main server
When both the active and standby main servers are up, you can connect to either to open the applications. If only one server is up, you must connect to that server.

8.2 5620 SAM applications
Table 81 describes the applications and lists the URLs from which you can access the individual applications. You can also open certain applications from a 5620 SAM GUI
client; others allow you to open the GUI client from the application.
You must configure the Browser Path parameter in your User Preferences to launch a specific browser from the 5620 SAM client. See Procedure 81 for more information.
Supervision applications require that your 5620 SAM administrator create supervision groups and settings. See the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide for more information.
Some 5620 SAM applications use the REST architecture. See Table 81 for a list of supported applications and the URL to access the REST API documentation.
Table 81 5620 SAM applications
Application Description Direct URL Launch Launch REST API documentation URL
5620 SAM application
GUI client from 5620
from SAM GUI
application client

Equipment Provides a view of http(s)://server/EquipmentView —
View shelves that are
configured on 1830 PSS
devices, and displays and
traces physical links

Fault Provides alarm monitoring, http(s)://server/FaultManagement http(s)://server/FaultManagement/api
Management correlation, and docs/
troubleshooting for the
most unhealthy NEs in the
network, allowing you to
filter, identify root causes,
and determine the impact
of alarms

Inventory Provides a dashboard http(s)://server/DCInventory —
Management inventory view of virtual
network components and
virtualized services in the
network, allowing you to
filter, search, and map
data center network
elements

Link Provides IP, MPLS, and http(s)://server/utilizationStats —
Utilization aggregated utilization
statistics for interfaces
within a specific domain

Optical Provides a three http(s)://server/OpticalService —
Service dimensional view of the
View underlying OTN layers for
an optical transport
service

Power Provides detailed http(s)://server/XRSPowerManagement —
Management information about the
Dashboard power usage of 7950 XRS
NEs in the network

Service Provides a dashboard of http(s)://server/DCServiceNavigator —
Navigator the operational health of
the service objects in a
specified administrative
domain

Service Provides alarm and KPI http(s)://server/ServiceSupervision —
Supervision monitoring on userdefined
service views and groups

Subscriber Provides NE and http(s)://server/SubscriberManagement —
Management subscriber KPI
Dashboard information, alarm
monitoring and correlation,
and troubleshooting
information for subscriber
hosts

System Provides 5620 SAM http(s)://server/systemMonitor —
Monitor system component status
and KPI information

Wireless Provides alarm monitoring http(s)://server/WirelessSupervision —
Supervision based on userdefined
views and groups for an
LTE RAN network

8.3 Procedures to manage 5620 SAM applications
The following procedures describe tasks that you must perform using a 5620 SAM GUI client to enable 5620 SAM application use on the client station.
See the 5620 SAM System Administrator Guide for administrative tasks that must be performed by a 5620 SAM administrator, such as creating user groups, configuring
supervision settings, and configuring system preferences.

Procedure 81 To set the browser path
You must configure the Browser Path parameter in your User Preferences to launch a specific browser from the 5620 SAM client.
2. Click Browse to choose the .exe file from the appropriate application folder.
3. Save the changes and close the form.

Getting Started

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Getting Started

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

06.07.

1. Choose Application Exit from the 5620 SAM main menu. A dialog box appears.

b. Choose Window Cascade from the 5620 SAM main menu. The forms are displayed overlapping and equally sized, showing the titlebar for each form.

b. Choose Window Tile Horizontal from the 5620 SAM main menu. The forms are displayed one above the other.

c. Choose Window Tile Square from the 5620 SAM main menu. The forms are displayed in a grid.

6. To restore windows and forms to their preferred settings, choose Window Reset to Preferred Sizes from the 5620 SAM main menu.

7. To close all open windows and forms, choose Window Close All Internal Windows from the 5620 SAM main menu. External windows are not affected.

ii. Choose Window Save Opened Configuration Forms from the 5620 SAM main menu. The open forms are saved as a set of quick­access forms.

ii. Choose Window Move to External Window from the 5620 SAM main menu.

f. Choose Application Go To Property Form from the 5620 SAM main menu and paste a property form identifier from the 5620 SAM clipboard; see Procedure 3­13.

1. Choose Application User Preferences from the 5620 SAM main menu. The User Preferences form opens.

Manage MPLS Manual Bypass LSPs

Manage MPLS Static LSPs

Manage MPLS MPLS Paths

Manage VLAN Paths

1. Choose Application Manage Workspaces from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Workspaces form opens.

1. Choose Manage Service Services from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Services form opens.

1. Choose Manage MPLS MPLS Paths from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage MPLS Paths form opens.

1. Choose Manage MPLS Dynamic LSPs from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Dynamic LSPs form opens.

1. Choose Manage MPLS Dynamic LSPs from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Dynamic LSPs form opens.

ii. Press . The map shifts to display the first object that matches the search criterion.

b. Right­click on the map background and choose Equipment Create Group.

c. In the map navigation tree, right­click on the Network icon or an existing group icon and choose Equipment Create Group.

1. Choose Application Physical Topology, or Service Tunnel Topology from the 5620 SAM main menu. The appropriate map window opens.

1. Open the map window that contains the equipment group. Choose Application Physical Topology, or Application Service Tunnel Topology from the 5620 SAM main

b. Choose Manage Service Composite Services from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Composite Services form opens.

1. Choose Create Equipment Physical Link from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Physical Link (Create) form opens.

1. Choose Manage Equipment Equipment from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Equipment form opens.

1. Choose Manage Equipment Equipment from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Equipment form opens.

1. Choose Manage Equipment Equipment from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Manage Equipment form opens.

1. Choose Tools Schedules Schedule from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Schedule form opens.

1. Choose Tools Schedules Scheduled Task from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Scheduled Task list form opens.

1. Choose Tools Schedules Scheduled Task from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Scheduled Task form opens.

2. Choose Tools Schedules Scheduled Task from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Scheduled Task form opens.

1. Choose Tools Schedules Scheduled Task from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Scheduled Task form opens.

1. Choose Tools Schedules Scheduled Task from the 5620 SAM main menu. The Scheduled Task form opens.

You might also like

ii. Choose Window Save Opened Configuration Forms from the 5620 SAM main menu. The open forms are saved as a set of quickaccess forms.

f. Choose Application Go To Property Form from the 5620 SAM main menu and paste a property form identifier from the 5620 SAM clipboard; see Procedure 313.

b. Rightclick on the map background and choose Equipment Create Group.

c. In the map navigation tree, rightclick on the Network icon or an existing group icon and choose Equipment Create Group.